advertisement
Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway
Command Reference Guide
Document No. 21-30004
0
Issue 1
March 31, 2004
Copyright 2004, Avaya Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Warranty
Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .
How to Get Help
For additional support telephone numbers, go to the Avaya support
Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support . If you are:
• Within the United States, click the Escalation Management link.
Then click the appropriate link for the type of support you need.
• Outside the United States, click the Escalation Management link.
Then click the International Services link that includes telephone numbers for the international Centers of Excellence.
Providing Telecommunications Security
Telecommunications security (of voice, data, and/or video communications) is the prevention of any type of intrusion to (that is, either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of) your company's telecommunications equipment by some party.
Your company's “telecommunications equipment” includes both this
Avaya product and any other voice/data/video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product (that is, “networked equipment”).
An “outside party” is anyone who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf. Whereas, a
“malicious party” is anyone (including someone who may be otherwise authorized) who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent.
Such intrusions may be either to/through synchronous (timemultiplexed and/or circuit-based) or asynchronous (character-, message-, or packet-based) equipment or interfaces for reasons of:
• Utilization (of capabilities special to the accessed equipment)
• Theft (such as, of intellectual property, financial assets, or toll facility access)
• Eavesdropping (privacy invasions to humans)
• Mischief (troubling, but apparently innocuous, tampering)
• Harm (such as harmful tampering, data loss or alteration, regardless of motive or intent)
Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and/or its networked equipment. Also realize that, if such an intrusion should occur, it could result in a variety of losses to your company (including but not limited to, human/data privacy, intellectual property, material assets, financial resources, labor costs, and/or legal costs).
Responsibility for Your Company’s Telecommunications Security
The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you - Avaya’s customer system administrator, your telecommunications peers, and your managers.
Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to:
• Installation documents
• System administration documents
• Security documents
• Hardware-/software-based security tools
• Shared information between you and your peers
• Telecommunications security experts
To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment, you and your peers should carefully program and configure:
• Your Avaya-provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces
• Your Avaya-provided software applications, as well as their underlying hardware/software platforms and interfaces
• Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products
TCP/IP Facilities
Customers may experience differences in product performance, reliability and security depending upon network configurations/design and topologies, even when the product performs as warranted.
Standards Compliance
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc. could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Product Safety Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable:
Safety of Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950, 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with
IEC for Electrical Equipment (IECEE) CB-96A.
Safety of Information Technology Equipment, CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 60950-00 / UL 60950, 3rd Edition
Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment, ACA Technical
Standard (TS) 001 - 1997
One or more of the following Mexican national standards, as applicable: NOM 001 SCFI 1993, NOM SCFI 016 1993, NOM 019
SCFI 1998
The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1
LASER Device(s). These devices comply with the following standards:
• EN 60825-1, Edition 1.1, 1998-01
• 21 CFR 1040.10 and CFR 1040.11.
The LASER devices operate within the following parameters:
• Maximum power output: -5 dBm to -8 dBm
• Center Wavelength: 1310 nm to 1360 nm
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposures. Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product information.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards and all relevant national deviations:
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of
Information Technology Equipment, CISPR 22:1997 and
EN55022:1998.
Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics –
Limits and Methods of Measurement, CISPR 24:1997 and
EN55024:1998, including:
• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2
• Radiated Immunity IEC 61000-4-3
• Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4
• Lightning Effects IEC 61000-4-5
• Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6
• Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8
• Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000-4-11
• Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000-3-2
• Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000-3-3
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference
Information
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal
Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a
Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.
Declarations of Conformity
United States FCC Part 68 Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
(SDoC)
Avaya Inc. in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB-168 label identification number complies with the FCC’s Rules and
Regulations 47 CFR Part 68, and the Administrative Council on
Terminal Attachments (ACTA) adopted technical criteria.
Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset-equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph
68.316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid
Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids.
Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U. S. can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .
All Avaya media servers and media gateways are compliant with FCC
Part 68, but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available. A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at: http://www.part68.org by conducting a search using “Avaya” as manufacturer.
European Union Declarations of Conformity
To order copies of this and other documents:
Call: Avaya Publications Center
Voice 1.800.457.1235 or 1.207.866.6701
FAX 1.800.457.1764 or 1.207.626.7269
Write: Globalware Solutions
200 Ward Hill Avenue
Haverhill, MA 01835 USA
Attention: Avaya Account Management
E-mail: [email protected]
For the most current versions of documentation, go to the Avaya support Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .
Avaya Inc. declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark conforms to the
European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive (1999/5/EC), including the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13, as applicable.
Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .
Japan
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary
Control Council for Interference by Information Technology
Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.
Contents
Chapter 3: Configuration File Commands................................................. 13
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide i
Contents
copy tftp SW_powerinline_image .................................................................29
copy wireless-gateway-running tftp ..............................................................31
Chapter 4: Connection Management Commands ...................................... 37
set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset} ....................42
ii
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time ..........................................56
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time .......................................57
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Contents
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time ......................................... 58
show intelligent-multicast hardware-support ................................................ 60
Chapter 7: Layer 2 Switching Commands................................................. 67
Chapter 8: LAP and Radio Card Commands............................................. 87
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide iii
Contents
show rogue ap authorized mac list ..............................................................135
Chapter 9: Logging and RMON Commands ........................................... 145
iv Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Contents
Chapter 10: Policy Commands ................................................................ 179
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide v
Contents
Configuring a QoS Policy for Incoming Traffic: ........................................241
Configuring a QoS Policy for Outgoing Traffic ..........................................243
Chapter 11: W310 Port Commands ......................................................... 249
vi Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Contents
set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement .................................. 253
show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement .............................. 294
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide vii
Contents
Chapter 12: Wireless Authentication and Security Commands .............. 311
set dot1x system-auth-control disable .........................................................318
set dot1x system-auth-control enable ..........................................................318
viii Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Contents
Chapter 16: System Commands .............................................................. 361
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide ix
Contents
show tftp download software status ............................................................383
x
Chapter 18: User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands ...................... 395
set radius authentication retry-number ........................................................401
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Contents
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide xi
Contents xii Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 1
Using the CLI
Overview
This chapter describes the Avaya W310 command line interface (CLI) architecture and conventions, and provides instructions for accessing the Avaya W310 for configuration purposes.
The configuration procedure involves
• establishing a Telnet session or a serial connection and
• using the Avaya W310’s internal CLI.
Note: The W310 supports only one active serial connection.
The CLI is command-line driven and does not have any menus. To activate a configuration option, you must type the desired command at the prompt and press Enter.
You can also configure your Avaya W310 using the W310 Manager with its graphical user interface. For details, see the Avaya™ W310 User’s Guide and the Avaya™ W310 Device
Manager User’s Guide on the Documentation and Utilities CD.
Chapter Contents
This chapter contains the following sections:
• Symbols for Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
•
•
•
•
Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 1
2
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
Conventions Used
The following conventions are used in this manual to convey instructions and information:
• Mandatory keywords are in boldface.
• Variables that you supply are in pointed brackets <>.
• Optional keywords are in square brackets [].
• Alternative but mandatory keywords are grouped in braces {} and separated by a vertical bar |.
• If you enter an alphanumeric string of two words or more, enclose the string in inverted commas.
• Information displayed on screen is displayed in text font.
CLI Help
The CLI has its own Help utility. Use the following key sequences to operate the CLI Help:
• To display all commands available in a command mode a question mark.
• To display all commands starting with a certain string, type the first few letters followed by a question mark.
• To get help containing all command parameters with their legal values as well as its syntax and an example, type a question mark at the end of command or at the stage where it is unique.
• Use the Tab key to complete an unambiguous command.
Example: W310> show?
Command Line Prompt
The command prompt is not hierarchical in structure. If you wish to use several commands, each beginning with the same keyword, you must retype all parts of the command each time.
For example, if after you want to set the system contact and the system name you must type both set system contact and set system name. However, you can use command abbreviations.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts
Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts
The CLI contains a simple text editor with these functions:
Table 1.1
Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts
Keyboard
Backspace
Up arrow/Down arrow
Left arrow/Right arrow
Tab
Enter
" "
Functions
Deletes the previous character
Scrolls back and forward through the command history buffer
Moves the cursor left or right
Completes the abbreviated command. Type the minimum number of characters unique to the command. An exception is the Reset System command which you must type in full.
Executes a single-line command
If you type a name with quotation marks, the marks are ignored.
Command Modes
You must be in the correct command mode to issue specific CLI commands. For example, if the command is for a Light Access Point (LAP) connected to a port on the W310, then you must be in the LAP mode. Make sure you are in the correct command mode before you start your configuration.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 3
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
Table 1.2
CLI Command Modes
4
Command Mode Description
Root
SSID
LAP
LAP Template
AP Group
Interface
User Group
ACL List
QoS List
To Access Prompt
Configures and displays SSID settings.
Configures and displays LAP settings.
Accesses the radio card templates.
! The W310 has one LAP template that consists of two subtemplates:
802.11a radio cards, and
802.11g radio cards.
Configures AP groups, also called policy enforcement points
(PEPs).
Configures user groups.
Configures QoS policies.
Log in ssid <name> lap <lap-name> lap-template
<template-name> interface AP-Group
<group-name>
Determined by security level of user account:
• >
• #
• (super)#
See
information.
(SSID <ssid-name>)#
(LAP <lap-name>)#
(802.1 <template-name> template)
(AP-Group <group-name>)# user-group <groupname>
(User group <group-name>)#
(ACL <index>)# list <index> ip qos-list <index> (QoS <index>)#
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Command Modes
Table 1.2
CLI Command Modes
Command Mode Description
IP Rule Configures IP policy rules or QoS policy rules.
Composite
Operation
DSCP Table
Configures composite operations.
Configures DSCP values in the DSCP table.
To Access Prompt
ip-rule {<index> | default}
! You must be in ACL List or QoS List mode to enter this command. compositeoperation <index>
! You must be in either
ACL List or
QoS List mode to enter this command. dscp-table <value>
! You must be in either
ACL List or
QoS List mode to enter this command.
• (ACL <index>/ ip rule {<index> | default}#
• (QoS <index>/ ip rule {<index> | default}#
(.../CompOp <index-number>)#
(.../dscp <value>)#
2 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 5
6
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive. That is, uppercase and lowercase characters may be interchanged freely.
Command Abbreviations
All commands and parameters in the CLI can be truncated to an abbreviation of any length, as long as the abbreviation is not ambiguous. For example, version can be abbreviated ver
.
For ambiguous commands, type the beginning letters on the command line and then use the
Tab key to toggle through all the possible commands beginning with these letters.
Universal Commands
Universal commands are commands that can be issued anywhere in the hierarchical tree.
Top and Up commands
The Up command moves you up to the next highest level in the CLI command hierarchy.
The Top command moves you to the highest level.
Retstatus command
Use the retstatus command to show whether the last CLI command you performed was successful. It displays the return status of the previous command.
The syntax for this command is: retstatus
Output Example:
W310 # set port negotiation 4 disable
Link negotiation protocol disabled on port 4.
Tree command
The tree command displays the commands that are available at your current location in the CLI hierarchy.
The syntax for this command is: tree
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Security Levels
Security Levels
There are four security access levels – User, Privileged, Supervisor, and Technician.
• User level is a general access level used to show system parameter values.
• Privileged level is used by site personnel to access configuration options.
• Supervisor level is used to define user names, passwords, and access levels of up to ten local users.
• Technician level is for use by Avaya Technical Support only.
A login name and password are always required to access the CLI and the commands. The login names and passwords, and security levels are established using the username command.
Entering the Supervisor Level
The Supervisor level is the level in which you first enter the Avaya W310 CLI and establish user names for up to 10 local users. When you enter the Supervisor level, you are asked for a
Login name. Type root as the Login name and the default password root (in lowercase letters):
Welcome to W310
Login: root
Password:****
Password accepted.
W310-N(super)#
Defining new users
Define new users and access levels using the username command in Supervisor Level.
Exiting the Supervisor Level
To exit the Supervisor level, type the command exit.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 7
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
Entering the CLI
To enter the CLI, enter your username and password. Your access level is indicated in the prompt as follows:
The User level prompt is shown below:
W310-N>
The Privileged level prompt is shown below:
W310-N#
The Supervisor level prompt is shown below:
W310-N(super)#
Entering the Technician Level
This level is can be accessed only from the Privileged and Supervisor levels not from the
User level.
This feature is not documented and is for use by Avaya Technical Support only.
8 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 2
AP Group Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure access point (AP) groups:
•
•
•
•
add-ports
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: AP Group Interface
Use the add-ports command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group. The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: add-ports <ports>
Syntax
<ports>
Description
Port number. The port cannot be attached to any other AP Group.
To specify a port or range of ports, for example, 8-12.
Example:
To add a port to an AP Group:
W310-1(super/AP-Group flr3)# add-ports 2,4,5-8
W310-1(super/AP-Group flr3)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 9
Chapter 2 AP Group Commands
Related Commands:
• Use
to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.
• Use
interface AP-Group to create an AP group.
• Use the
command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and port members.
delete-ports
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: AP Group Interface
Use the delete-ports command to delete ports from an Access Point (AP) Group. If you do not specify a port number, the switch displays a list of ports that are attached to the AP
Group.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: delete-ports <ports>
Syntax
<ports>
Description
Port number of the port you want to delete.
Example:
To delete a port from an AP Group:
W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)# delete-port 8
Done!
W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#
Note: If the port specified is not a member of the AP Group, you receive the message: port x is not a member in the AP Group
10 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 2
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.
The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.
• Use the
show AP-Group command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and
port members.
interface AP-Group
User level: supervisor
Use the interface AP-Group command to create an Access Point (AP) group interface. This name represents a Light Access Point’s (LAP) AP group name.
A default AP Group named Default exists on the W310. This AP Group will use the following policy rules:
• Ingress and egress direction of the default AP group has an attached default ACL policy. of allow all traffic.
Use the [no] form of this command to remove the name for the AP Group.
Syntax:
[no] interface AP-Group <group-name>
The syntax for this command is:
Syntax
<group-name>
Description
AP Group name that pertains to a Light Access Point. Use up to
20 characters.
Example:
To create an AP group name:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group engineering
W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.
The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.
•
to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.
• Use the
command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and
port members.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 11
Chapter 2 AP Group Commands
show AP-Group
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, AP-Group Interface
Use the show ap group command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and port members.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show AP-Group
Example:
W310-1# show ap-group num of entries 3
AP-Group Name AP-Group Id ports
--------------------- ----------- ------
floor2 1 1
floor1 2 4
floor3 3 8
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.
The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.
• Use
to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.
• Use
12 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
Configuration File Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to manage the W310 configuration files:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
copy tftp SW_powerinline_image
•
copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup
•
copy wireless-gateway-running tftp
•
copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 13
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy mobility-running tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy mobility-running tftp command to upload the mobility running configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol
(TFTP) server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy mobility-running tftp <filename> <ip_address>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip_address>
Description
The destination file name (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example:
W310-1# copy mobility-running tftp c:\mobility01.cfg
149.49.66.17
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show upload status' command.
copy mobility-startup tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy mobility-startup tftp command to upload the mobility startup configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a TFTP sever.
14 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy mobility-startup tftp <filename> <ip_address>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip_address>
Description
The destination file name (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example:
W310-1# copy mobility-startup tftp c:\mobility01.cfg
149.49.66.17
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show upload status' command.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 15
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy module-config tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy module-config tftp command to upload the W310 configuration from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.
If an error occurred during upload (you can check this using the command show tftp upload status
) you must fix the problem. The following is a list of possible problems:
If this is the problem:
Then perform the upload procedure again
twice as follows:
You did not create an empty text file at the destination server (0 Bytes).
You do not have the correct path to the file.
The destination server is not active/ on.
Delete the destination file and recreate a correctly named empty file at the destination server (0 bytes)
Type the command copy module-config tftp
for the first time.
Delete the destination file and recreate a correctly named empty file at the destination server (0 bytes)
The destination server is unreachable.
Type the command copy module-config tftp
again, a second time.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy module-config tftp <filename> <ip> <module number>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
<module number>
Description
The destination file name (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
1
16 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
Example:
W310-1# copy module-config tftp c:\config\switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10 1
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show tftp upload status' command
********************************************************************
* If you are currently running the W310 Device Manager application,*
* it is recommended to exit from it before performing configuration*
* download operations. *
********************************************************************
copy running-config tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy running-config tftp command to upload the W310 running configuration from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy running-config tftp <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
Destination file name on the TFTP server (full path).
The ip address of the TFTP server.
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy running-config tftp c:\w310\running.cfg
149.49.100.41
Example: (for Unix):
W310-1# copy running-config tftp /folder/w310/running.cfg
149.49.100.41
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 17
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy stack-config tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy stack-config tftp command to upload the stack-level parameters from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.
! Create the file into which you wish to upload the stack-level parameters prior to executing this command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy stack-config tftp <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The destination file name (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example:
W310-1# copy stack-config tftp c:\conf.cfg 192.168.49.10
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information , use 'upload status' command
********************************************************************
* If you are currently running the W310 Device Manager application,*
* it is recommended to exit from it before performing configuration*
* download operations. *
********************************************************************
18 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy startup-config tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy startup-config tftp command to upload the W310 startup configuration from the current NVRAM startup configuration to a TFTP server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy startup-config tftp <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
Destination file name on the tftp server (full path).
The ip address of the tftp server.
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy startup-config tftp c:\w310\startup.cfg
149.49.100.41
Example: (for Unix):
W310-1# copy startup-config tftp /folder/w310/startup.cfg
149.49.100.41
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 19
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy tftp EW_Archive
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp EW-archive command to download the W310 Manager application from a TFTP server to the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp EW_archive <filename> <ip> <module number>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
<module number>
Description
W310 Manager image file name (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
1
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp EW-archive c:\W310\switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10 1
Example: (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp EW-archive /folder/startup.cfg
149.49.100.41 1
20 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy tftp LAP_image
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp LAP_image command to download a Light Access Point configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the
W310.
! Before downloading the Light Access Point configuration file, you must initialize
command).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp LAP_image <platform> <filename> <ip_address>
<bank_value>
Syntax
<platform>
<filename> ip bank_value
Description
Type of Access Point.
• LAP
• AP4
The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Bank from which the LAP will boot. This value is one of the following:
• bank-A
• bank-B
• auto - will boot from the first available
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# W310-1(configure)# copy tftp LAP_image AP600
c:\lap_image01 149.49.66.17 bank-a
Beginning download operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 21
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy tftp mobility-startup
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp mobility-startup command to download a mobility startup configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM mobility startup configuration of the W310.
! Before downloading the mobility startup configuration file, you should initialize
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp mobility-startup <filename> <ip_address>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip_address>
Description
The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp mobility-startup c:\mobility01.cfg
149.49.66.17
Beginning download operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.
22 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy tftp module-config
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp module-config command to download a W310-level configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of a
W310.
! Before downloading the W310 configuration file, you should initialize NVRAM
(
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp module-config <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp module-config c:\config\switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10
Example: (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp module-config /folder/startup.cfg
192.168.49.10
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 23
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy tftp policy-startup
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp policy-startup command to download a policy configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the W310.
! Before downloading the policy configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM ( nvram initialize
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp policy-startup <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp policy-startup c:\config\switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10
Example (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp policy-startup /folder/switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10
24 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy tftp stack-config
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp stack-config command to download a stack-level configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the
W310.
! Before downloading the stack-level configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM
(
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp stack-config <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp stack-config c:\config\switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10
Example (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp stack-config /folder/switch1.cfg
192.168.49.10
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 25
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
copy tftp startup-config
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp startup-config command to download a startup configuration file from a TFTP server to the Startup Configuration file in the W310 NVRAM.
! Before downloading the startup configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM ( nvram initialize
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp startup-config <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
Source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server.
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp startup-config c:\W310\startup.cfg
149.49.100.41
Example: (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp startup-config /folder/startup.cfg
149.49.100.41
26 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy tftp SW_image
Use the copy tftp SW_image command to download a new firmware software version to bank B while either keeping the old version in bank A, or downloading the Embedded
Web manager software to bank A.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp SW_image <sw-image-file> EW_archive <EmWeb_File>
<ip_address> <mod_num>
Syntax
<sw-image-file>
<EmWeb_File>
<ip_address>
<mod_num>
Description
Firmware image file name (full path)
Embedded Web Manager image file name (full path) -
! If the Embedded Web Manager file name that you enter does not exist, the Embedded Web image is not downloaded and there will no longer be an image residing on the W310.
The IP address of the TFTP server
1
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 27
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy tftp SW_image c:\versions\W310\W310t EW_image
x 149.49.138.170 1
Example (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp SW_image /folder/versions/W310/W310t
EW_image x 149.49.138.170 1
Example:
W310-1# copy tftp SW_image /home/W310/viisa EW_archive 1
135.64.103.104 1
Module : 1
Source file : /home/W310/viisa
Destination file : W310
Host : 135.64.103.104
Running state : Download Process Started
Failure display : no-error
Last warning : -
.....
Module : 1
Source file : /home/W310/viisa
Destination file : W310
Host : 135.64.103.104
Running state : Testing ...
Failure display : no-error
Last warning : -
.............
Module : 1
Source file : /home/W310/viisa
Destination file : W310
Host : 135.64.103.104
Running state : Erasing FLASH
Failure display : no-error
Last warning : -
.....
28 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
Module : 1
Source file : /home/W310/viisa
Destination file : W310
Host : 135.64.103.104
Running state : Downloading ...
Failure display : no-error
Last warning : -
...
Module : 1
Source file : /home/W310/viisa
Destination file : W310
Host : 135.64.103.104
Running state : Download Ok
Failure display : no-error
Last warning : -
copy tftp SW_powerinline_image
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp SW_powerinline_image command to download the inline software application from a TFTP server to the memory of a designated module. You need to be in privilege mode to execute this command.
! Before executing the download, the embedded software performs the following checks on the TFTP server file:
— Ensures that the file size is within its allocated space.
— Checks that the file contains embedded web SW for this application
— Verifies the file validity by calculating the checksum.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 29
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp SW_powerinline_image <image-file> <ip-addr> <modnum>
Syntax
<image_file>
<ip_addr>
<mod_num>
Description
Common name for the file that contain the Power over
Ethernet (PoE) Software image and the Embedded Web archive (full path)
IP address of the TFTP host
1
Example:
W310-1# copy tftp SW_powerinline_image c:\W310\w310_203
192.168.49.10 1
Module: 5
Source file: c:\w310\w310_203
Destination file:
Host:
Powerinline
192.168.49.10
Running state:
Failure Display:
Last warning:
Downloading
Access Violation
Download completed
copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup command to download a wireless gateway configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM startup configuration of the W310.
! Before downloading the wireless gateway configuration file, you must initialize
30 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp mobility-startup <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
Source file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example (for Windows):
W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp c:\wireless-
gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show upload status' command.
Example (for Unix):
W310-1# copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup /folder/
gateway01.cfg 192.168.49.66
copy wireless-gateway-running tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy wireless-gateway-running tftp command to upload the wireless gateway running configuration from the W310 NVRAM configuration to a TFTP server.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 31
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy wireless-gateway-running tftp <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The destination file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example:
W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-running tftp c:\wireless-
gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show upload status' command.
32 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp command to upload the wireless gateway startup configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a TFTP server.
! Create the file into which you wish to upload the wireless gateway parameters prior to executing this command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp <filename> <ip>
Syntax
<filename>
<ip>
Description
The destination file name on the TFTP server (full path)
The IP address of the TFTP server
Example:
W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp c:\wireless-
gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66
Beginning upload operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show upload status' command.
erase startup-config
! This command is not applicable.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 33
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
show copy status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show copy status command to show the status of the local configuration copy operation.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show copy status
Example:
W310-1> show copy status
Module #1
===========
Module : 1
Source file : .router-startup
Destination file : .router-running
Host : -
Running state : Idle
Failure display : (null)
Last warning : No-warning
show erase status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show erase status command to view the status of the erase configuration operation.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show erase status
34 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 3
show running-config
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show running-config command to display the W310 running configuration, which includes the actual templates applied to the W310 and any W110s connected to its ports.
This command does not display the actual configuration being used for the W110. It displays
only the running templates. Use the show lap parameters
command to display the actual configuration.
Note: When you run this command, the command prompt may appear within the actual result. This is not an error but is due to the response time for receiving the data.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show running-config
Example:
W310-1> show running config
#!#$@ DO NOT REMOVE THIS LINE - Avaya Inc. - W310 - configuration
!
!
! Avaya Inc. - W310 - configuration
! version 4.3.24
user-group default
exit
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 35
Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands
show upload status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show upload status commands to display the status of the current TFTP configuration file copy process to or from the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show upload status [<mod_num>]
Syntax
[<mod_num>]
Description
1
Example:
W310-1> show upload status 1
Module : 1
Source file : stack-config
Destination file : c:\conf.cfg
Host : 149.49.36.200
Running state : Executing
Failure display : (null)
Last warning : No-warning
36 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
Connection Management Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to manage connections to the W310 and the network:
•
•
•
•
•
•
set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}
•
set ppp authentication incoming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 37
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
set allowed managers
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set allowed managers command to enable or disable the Allowed Managers feature.
When this feature is enabled, only those stations whose IP addresses are listed in the
Allowed Managers table can access the device over Telnet, SNMP, or HTTP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set allowed managers {enabled | disabled}
Example:
W310-1(super)# set allowed managers enabled
Managers are enabled
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add or remove an IP address
from the Allowed Managers table.
• Use the
command to display the activation
status of the Allowed Managers feature.
• Use the
to display the list of the twenty
possible allowed managers IP addresses.
38 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
set allowed managers ip
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set allowed manager ip command to add or remove an IP address from the
Allowed Managers table. The Allowed Managers table can contain up to twenty (20) IP addresses.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set allowed managers ip {add | delete} <IP address>
Syntax
add delete
<IP address>
Description
Adds specified IP address to the Allowed Managers table
Deletes specified IP address from the Allowed Managers table
IP address to be added or removed
Example:
W310-1# set allowed managers ip add 149.49.32.134
Ip was added to the table
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the Allowed
Managers feature.
• Use the
command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.
• Use the
to display the list of the twenty possible allowed managers IP addresses.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 39
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
set inband vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set inband vlan command to set the inband management VLAN.
! If you change the management VLAN, you must reset all the W310s in your domain in order to ensure that the VLAN change takes effect.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set inband vlan <value>
Syntax
<value>
Description
Number of the VLAN to be assigned to the management interface.
Example:
W310-1# set inband vlan 1
Management VLAN number set to 1
set interface inband
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set interface inband command to configure the Management inband interface.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set interface inband <vlan> <ip_addr> <netmask>
40
Syntax
<vlan>
<ip_addr>
<netmask>
Description
The number of the VLAN to be assigned to the interface
IP address of the inband interface
Subnet mask
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
Example:
To configure the inband interface on VLAN 1, IP address 1.1.1.1 and netmask
255.255.255.24:
W310-1# set interface inband 1 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.24
Interface inband IP address set.
You must reset the device in order for the change to take effect.
Related Commands:
command to display information on network interfaces.
set interface ppp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set interface ppp command to configure the PPP interface IP parameters.
You must configure an IP address and net-mask for the W310 before you can establish a PPP connection. The IP address is a dummy address that is shared between two peers, and must be taken from a subnet that is different from the switch’s inband IP subnet.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set interface ppp <ip_addr> <net-mask>
Syntax
<ip_addr>
<net-mask>
Description
IP address used by the W310 to connect via its PPP interface
Subnet mask used by the W310 to connect via its PPP interface
Example:
W310-1# set interface ppp 149.49.34.125 24
Interface ppp ip address set
Related Commands:
command to display information on network interfaces.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 41
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set interface ppp command to enter modem mode, enter terminal mode, disconnect the PPP session or to reset the connected modem.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}
Syntax
enable enable-always disable off reset
Description
Enable PPP and enter modem mode.
Enter modem mode every time that the proprietary modem cable is plugged into the console port.
Disable PPP and enter terminal mode
Disconnect the active PPP session.
Reset the connected modem.
Example:
W310-1# set interface ppp reset
PPP has reset the connected modem.
Example:
W310-1# set interface ppp enable
Entering the Modem mode within 60 seconds...
Please check that the proprietary modem cable is plugged into the console port
Example:
W310-1# set interface ppp disable
Entering the Terminal mode immediately
42 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
set ppp authentication incoming
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set ppp authentication incoming command to define the authentication method used for a PPP server or client session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set ppp authentication incoming {pap | chap | none}
Syntax
pap chap none
Description
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) method
Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) method
No authentication
Example:
W310-1# set ppp authentication incoming chap
PPP requires CHAP authentication for incoming sessions.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to display the authentication method used for PPP sessions.
• Use the
command to display the ppp configuration.
set ppp baud-rate
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set ppp baud-rate command to define the baud rate used in PPP sessions.
! The peer baud rate must be set at the same value as the host.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set ppp baud-rate {9600 | 19200 | 38400}
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 43
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
Example:
W310-1# set ppp baud-rate 38400 ppp baud rate was set to 38400
Related Commands:
• Use the
show ppp baud-rate command to display the ppp baud-rate.
• Use the
command to display the ppp configuration.
set ppp chap-secret
User level: supervisor
Use the set ppp chap-secret command to configure the “shared secret” used in PPP sessions with CHAP authentication. The chap-secret is not transferable via the configuration upload/download mechanism.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set ppp chap-secret <chap-secret>
Syntax
<chap-secret>
Description
The shared secret, 4 to 32 characters.
44 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
Example:
W310-1(super)# set ppp chap secret hush
PPP shared secret for CHAP authentication is set
set ppp incoming timeout
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set ppp incoming timeout command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set ppp incoming timeout <time>
Syntax
<time>
Description
The timeout in minutes
Example:
W310-1# set ppp incoming timeout 15
PPP incoming session will automatically disconnect after 15 minutes of idle time
Related Commands:
•
Use this show ppp incoming timeout
command to display the time in minutes that a PPP session can remain idle before being automatically disconnected.
• Use the
command to display the ppp configuration.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 45
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
show allowed managers status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show allowed managers status command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show allowed managers status
Example:
W310-1(super)# show allowed managers status
Managers are disabled.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the Allowed
Managers feature.
• Use the
• Use the
to display the list of the twenty
possible allowed managers IP addresses.
show allowed managers table
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show allowed managers table to display the list of the twenty possible allowed managers IP addresses.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show allowed managers table
46 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
Example:
W310-1(super)# show allowed managers table
1 ) 149.49.32.134
2 ) Not Used
3 ) Not Used
4 ) Not Used
5 ) Not Used
6 ) Not Used
7 ) Not Used
8 ) Not Used
9 ) Not Used
10) Not Used
11) Not Used
12) Not Used
13) Not Used
14) Not Used
15) Not Used
16) Not Used
17) Not Used
18) Not Used
19) Not Used
20) Not Used
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the Allowed
Managers feature.
• Use the
• Use the
command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.
ip http enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ip http enable command to enable HTTP access to the device. Use the no ip http
command to disable HTTP access to the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip http enable no ip http
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 47
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
Example:
W310-1# ip http enable
Done!
Example:
W310-1# no ip http
Done!
ip telnet enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ip telnet enable command to enable Telnet access to the switch. Use the no ip telnet
command to disable Telnet access to the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip telnet enable no ip telnet
Example:
W310-1# ip telnet enable
Done!
Example:
W310-1# no ip telnet
This will prevent future remote telnet sessions and disconnect all active telnet sessions - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Done!
Related Commands:
Use the
command to enable the switch to act as a Telnet client.
48 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
ip telnet-client
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ip telnet-client command to enable the switch to act as a Telnet client. Use the no ip telnet-client command to disable the switch from acting as a Telnet client.
! This command can be run only from the console port on the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip telnet-client no ip telnet-client
Example:
W310-1# ip telnet-client
Done!
Example:
W310-1# no ip telnet-client
Done!
Related Commands:
command to enable Telnet access to the switch.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 49
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
ping
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the ping command to send ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ping [<host> [<number>]]
Syntax
<host>
<number>
Description
Host IP address or Internet address of route destination. If omitted, then the host IP address specified in the last ping command is used.
Number of packets to send. If missing, then the number specified in the last ping command is used. If the last number is not available, the default is 4.
Example:
To ping the IP address 149.49.48.1 three times:
W310-1> ping 149.49.48.1 3
PING 149.49.48.1: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms
----149.49.48.1 PING Statistics----
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0
50 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
show ppp authentication
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show ppp authentication command to display the authentication method used for PPP sessions.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ppp authentication
Example:
W310-1> show ppp authentication
PPP Authentication Parameters:
------------------------------
Incoming: CHAP
Related Commands:
Use the set ppp authentication incoming
command to define the authentication
method used for a PPP server or client session.
show ppp baud-rate
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show ppp baud-rate command to display the ppp baud-rate.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ppp baud-rate
Example:
W310-1> show ppp baud-rate
PPP baud rate is 38400
Related Commands:
command to define the baud rate used in PPP sessions.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 51
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
show ppp configuration
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show ppp configuration command to display the ppp configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ppp configuration
Example:
W310-1> show ppp configuration
PPP baud rate is 38400
PPP incoming timeout is 15 minutes
PPP Authentication Parameters:
------------------------------
Incoming: None
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to define the baud rate used in PPP
sessions.
• Use the
command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.
• Use the
set ppp authentication incoming
authentication method used for a PPP server or client session.
show ppp incoming timeout
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use this show ppp incoming timeout command to display the time in minutes that a
PPP session can remain idle before being automatically disconnected.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ppp incoming timeout
52 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 4
Example:
W310-1> show ppp incoming timeout
PPP incoming timeout is 15 minutes
Related Commands:
Use the
command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.
show ppp session
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show ppp session command to display PPP parameters and statistics of an active PPP session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ppp session
Example:
W310-1> show ppp session
show secure current
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show secure current command to list the IP addresses of managers currently connected to the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show secure current
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 53
Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands
Example:
W310-1> show secure current
IP Address Time Since Last Request(In Sec)
-------------- ------------------------------------
135.64.100.205 7
149.49.77.13 13
149.49.77.7 2
telnet
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
! You need to enable this feature using the
Use the telnet command to open a Telnet session from the W310.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: telnet <ip-address> [<port-num>]
Syntax
<ip address>
[<port-num>]
Description
IP address of Telnet host
IP port number of Telnet host
Example:
W310-1# telnet 10.10.10.20
54 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 5
Intelligent Multicast Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure intelligent multicast:
•
•
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
•
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
•
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
•
•
show intelligent-multicast hardware-support
Intelligent multicast is an IP multicast filtering application.
set intelligent-multicast
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set intelligent-multicast command to enable or disable intelligent multicast, which is an IP multicast filtering application. For more information on intelligent multicast, see the Installation and Configuration Guide.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast {enable | disable}
Example:
W310-1# set intelligent-multicast enable
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for client ports.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
command to set group filtering time delay.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for router ports.
• Use the
command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 55
Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set intelligent-multicast client port pruning time command to set the aging time for client ports. This is the time after which a client port is removed from a session if no IGMP reports are received. The range is 30 to 1800 seconds.
The default setting is 60 seconds.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
Client port pruning time in seconds
Example:
W310-1# set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning-time
40
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable intelligent
multicast.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
command to set group filtering time delay
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for router ports.
• Use the
command to display the intelligent
multicast configuration.
56 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 5
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set intelligent-multicast group-filtering delay time command to set group filtering time delays. This is the time that the switch waits between learning of a Multicast group on a certain VLAN and starting to filter traffic for this group.
The valid range is 1 to 300 seconds. The default setting is 60 seconds.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
Group filtering time in seconds.
Example:
W310-1# set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
40
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable intelligent multicast.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for client ports.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for router ports.
• Use the
command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 57
Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time command to set the aging time for router ports. This is a timer that ages out Router port information if IGMP queries are not received within the configured time.
The valid range is 30 to 7200 seconds. The default setting is 120 seconds.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
Router port pruning time in seconds.
Example:
W310-1# set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning-time
40
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable intelligent
multicast.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for client ports.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
command to set group filtering time delay
• Use the
command to display the intelligent
multicast configuration.
58 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 5
show intelligent-multicast
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show intelligent-multicast command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show intelligent-multicast
Example:
W310-1> show intelligent-multicast
Intelligent-multicast configuration:
-----------------------------------intelligent-multicast state ---------------------- Disabled
Intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time --- 600[Sec]
Intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time --- 1800[Sec] intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time - 10[Sec]
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable intelligent multicast.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for client ports.
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
command to set group filtering time delay
• Use the
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
command to set the aging time for router ports.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 59
Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands
show intelligent-multicast hardware-support
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show intelligent-multicast hardware-support command to display the intelligent multicast hardware support configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show intelligent-multicast hardware-support
Example:
W310-1> show intelligent-multicast hardware support
Intelligent-multicast HW configuration:
# Module Sub-Module Cascade
------- ---------- --------
1 Support IPMc Not Installed Support IPMc
60 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 6
IP Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure IP:
•
•
•
•
•
clear ip route
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear ip route command to delete one or all of the dynamic routing entries from the Routing Table.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear ip route <destination gateway> <mask>
Syntax Description
<destination gateway> IP address of the IP route
<mask> IP address of the gateway associated with the IP route.
Example:
W310-1> clear ip route 192.168.49.1 255.255.255.0
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add a route to the IP routing table.
• Use the
command to display IP routing table entries.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 61
Chapter 6 IP Commands
ip icmp redirect
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ip icmp redirect command to enable ICMP redirects via the device. Use the no ip icmp redirect
command to disable ICMP redirects via the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip icmp redirect no ip icmp redirect
Example:
W310-1> ip icmp redirect
Done!
Example:
W310-1# no ip icmp redirect
Done!
set ip route
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set ip route command to add a route to the IP routing table. You can configure from 1 to 10 default static gateways for a W310 switch. To clear a route, use the
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set ip route <destination> <gateway>
Syntax
<destination>
<gateway>
Description
IP address of the network, or specific host to be added
IP address of the gateway associated with the IP route.
62 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 6
Example:
This example shows how to add a default route to the IP routing table:
W310-1# set ip route 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 destination = 0.0.0.0 gateway = 192.168.1.1
ROUTE NET TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 1 1 3199 se0
127.1.1.0 127.1.1.1 1 8 7606 se1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------
127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 5 2 131 lo0
10.10.10.10 192.168.1.1 7 0 0 se0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to clear an entry in the IP routing table.
• Use the
command to display IP routing table entries.
show interface
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show interface command to display information on network interfaces.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show interface
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 63
Chapter 6 IP Commands
Example:
W310-1> show interface
Interface Name Status VLAN IP address Netmask
---------------- -------------- ---- --------------- --------------inband disabled 1 135.64.200.105 255.255.255.0
ppp disabled N/A 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Related Commands:
• Use the
set interface inband command to configure the Management inband
interface.
• Use the
command to configure the PPP interface IP parameters.
show ip route
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show ip route command to display IP routing table entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show ip route
Example:
W310-1> show ip route
Destination Gateway
------------- -------------
0.0.0.0 149.49.54.1
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
64 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 6
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add a route to the IP routing table.
• Use the
clear ip route command to clear an entry in the IP routing table.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 65
Chapter 6 IP Commands
66 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Layer 2 Switching Commands
This chapter describes the CLI commands that you use to configure the W310:
•
•
•
•
mac-address-authorized-list-default
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show mac address authorized list
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 67
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
clear cam
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Deletes all entries in the MAC address table of the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear cam
Example:
W310-1> clear cam
CAM table cleared.
clear vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear vlan command to delete an existing VLAN and return its ports to the default VLAN 1. When you clear a VLAN, all ports assigned to that VLAN are assigned to the default VLAN 1.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear vlan [<vlan-id>|name <vlan_name>]
Syntax
[<vlan_id>]
<vlan_name>
Description
VLAN number
VLAN name
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
68 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Example:
W310-1# clear vlan 100
This command will assign all ports on vlan 100 to their default in the entire management domain - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
VLAN 100 was deleted successfully
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to configure VLANs.
• Use the
command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.
mac-address-authorized-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use mac-address-authorized-list command to add or remove a MAC address from the authorized list of devices. Table can contain up to 10000 entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: mac-address-authorized-list {add | remove} <mac-address>
[allow | deny | deny-and- notify]
Syntax Description
{add | remove}
<mac -address>
[allow | deny | denyand-notify]
Specify the operation (add or remove) for the specified MAC address that you want to add or remove from the wireless network.
The MAC address of a device.
Access type for the MAC address that you want to add.
• permit - allows wireless network operation for the MAC address.
• deny - does not allow wireless network operation for the
MAC address.
• deny-and-notify - does not allow wireless network operation for the MAC address and sends a notification to the supervisor.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 69
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
Example:
W310-1# mac-address-authorized-list add 00:04:d0:af:12:4
deny
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
mac-address-authorized-list-default
to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.
• Use the
show mac address authorized list
command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings.
mac-address-authorized-list-default
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the mac-address-authorized-list-default to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: mac-address-authorized-list-default {allow | deny | deny-andnotify
}
Syntax
{allow | deny | deny-and-notify}
Description
Default access type for the MAC address in the authorized list:
• permit—Allows the operation for the MAC addresses.
• deny—Does not allow the operation for the MAC addresses.
• deny-and-notify—Does not allow the operation for the
MAC addresses and sends a notification to the supervisor.
Example:
W310-1(super)# mac-address-authorized-list-default allow
Done!
70 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Related Commands:
•
Use mac-address-authorized-list
command to add or remove a MAC
address from the authorized list of devices. Table can contain up to 10000 entries.
• Use the
show mac address authorized list
command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings.
set arp-aging-interval
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set arp-aging interval command to set the aging interval for entries in the
Layer 2 ARP table.
The entry is deleted at the end of every aging interval. The default value is 10 minutes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set arp-aging-interval <value>
Syntax
<value>
Description
The number of minutes that an entry remains in the ARP cache.
The range is 0 to 10 minutes. 0 disables ARP aging.
Example:
W310-1# set arp-aging-interval 10
ARP table aging interval was set to 10 minutes.
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the ARP table aging interval
for table entries.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 71
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
set arp-tx-interval
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set arp-tx-interval command to set the keep-alive frames sending interval.
These keep-alive frames are used to maintain connectivity with silent stations in the network.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set arp-tx-interval <value>
Syntax
<value>
Description
The interval in seconds. The range is 0 to 3600. 0 disables the transmission of the keep-alive frames.
Example:
W310-1# set arp-tx-interval 15
ARP tx interval was set to 15 seconds.
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the keep-alive frames
transmission interval.
set mac-aging
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set mac-aging command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Set mac-aging {enable | disable}
72 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Example:
W310-1# set mac-aging enable mac aging is enabled.
W310-1# set mac-aging disable mac aging is disabled.
set mac-aging-time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set mac-aging-time command to set the MAC aging time in minutes. This is the time after which unused MAC addresses in the MAC table are erased.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set mac-aging-time <aging-time>
Syntax
<aging-time>
Description
Aging time in minutes (1-16666; default =5).
! The entered value is the aging time lower limit. The actual aging time might be up to three minutes longer.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 73
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
Example:
W310-1# set mac-aging-time 5 mac aging time is set to 5 minutes.
set vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set vlan command to configure VLANs. Use the
delete an existing VLAN.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set vlan <vlan-id> [name <vlan-name>]
Syntax
<vlan-id>
<vlan-name>
Description
VLAN number
VLAN name
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set vlan 3 name gregory
VLAN id 3, vlan-name gregory created.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to delete an existing VLAN.
• Use the
command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.
74 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
show arp-aging-interval
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show arp-aging-interval command to display the ARP table aging interval for table entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show arp-aging-interval
Example:
W310-1> show arp-aging-interval
ARP table aging interval was set to 10 minutes.
Related Commands:
Use the
command to set the aging interval for entries in the
Layer 2 ARP table.
show arp-tx-interval
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show arp-tx-interval command to display the keep-alive frames transmission interval.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show arp-tx-interval
Example:
W310-1> show arp-tx-interval
ARP tx interval is set to 5 seconds.
Related Commands:
Use the
set arp-tx-interval command to set the keep-alive frames sending interval.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 75
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
show cam
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show cam command to search all entries that match the criteria you specific in the command.
! MACs associated with LAGs appear under the LAG ID, not under the LAG port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show cam [<module>[/<port>]] show cam mac <mac-addr> [<vlan-id>] show cam vlan <vlan-id> [<module>[/<port>]]
Syntax
[<module>[/
<port>]]
<mac-addr>
<vlan-id>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
MAC address to search for.
VLAN ID to search for.
Example: (by MAC address)
W310-1# show cam mac 00-00-81-01-23-45
Dest MAC/Route Destination Ports
-------------- -----------------
00-00-81-01-23-45
00-00-81-01-23-46
1/9
1/9
Total Matching CAM Entries = 2
76 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Example: (by Module/Port)
W310-1> show cam 1/1 show cam 1/1
Dest MAC/Route Dest Destination Ports
------------------- -----------------
00-40-0d-59-03-78 1/1
00-d0-79-0a-0a-da 1/1
00-40-0d-43-1e-e9 1/1
...
00-40-0d-c6-24-01 1/1
Total Matching CAM Entries Displayed = 178
show l2-module-config
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show l2-module-config command to display W310 Layer 2 configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show l2-module-config
! A shortened example is shown below: the full output shows information on all the ports.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 77
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
Example:
W310-1# show l2-module-config
Please be patient.
Gathering and displaying the information might take a while.
W310-1(super)# !#
!# Upload time: Unavailable Unavailable
!# System descrtion: Avaya Inc. - W310
!# Master position: 1
!#
!# Module #: 1
!# Module type, expansion type: P333R-LB
!# Module-CS, expansion-CS: 3.0
!# MAC address: 00-40-0d-b9-89-00
!# Serial #: 4425161
!# SW versions - bank A, B, Boot: 3.12.2 4.0.3 3.3.0
!# Number of ports: 24
!#
!#THERE IS NO LINK AGGREGATION GROUP.
set internal buffering 1 med
!#
!#
78 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7 set port edge admin state 1/1 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/2 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/3 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/4 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/5 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/6 non-edge-port
--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port edge admin state 1/7 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/8 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/9 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/10 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/11 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/12 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/13 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/14 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/15 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/16 non-edge-port
!#*************** port 1/1 configuration *****************
!# Port type: 10/100Base-T
!# Link status: fail
!# STA status: Blocking
!#********************************************************
--type q to quit or space key to continue--
[Kset port disable 1/1 set port negotiation 1/1 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/1 off set port level 1/1 0 set trunk 1/1 off set port vlan 1 1/1 set port name 1/1 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/1 enable set port classification 1/1 regular set port enable 1/1
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 79
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
!#*************** port 1/2 configuration *****************
!# Port type: 10/100Base-T
!# Link status: fail
!# STA status: Blocking
!#******************************************************** set port disable 1/2 set port negotiation 1/2 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/2 off set port level 1/2 0 set trunk 1/2 off set port vlan 1 1/2 set port name 1/2 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/2 enable
--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port classification 1/2 regular set port enable 1/2
!#*************** port 1/3 configuration *****************
!# Port type: 10/100Base-T
!# Link status: fail
!# STA status: Blocking
!#******************************************************** set port disable 1/3 set port negotiation 1/3 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/3 off set port level 1/3 0 set trunk 1/3 off set port vlan 1 1/3 set port name 1/3 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/3 enable set port classification 1/3 regular set port enable 1/3
...
80 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
!#Set vlan table management parameters
!# set port vlan-binding-mode 1/1 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/2 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/3 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/4 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/5 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/6 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/7 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/8 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/9 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/10 static
--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port vlan-binding-mode 1/11 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/12 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/13 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/14 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/15 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/16 static
...
show l2-stack-config
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show l2-stack-config command to display Layer 2 stack configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show l2-stack-config
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 81
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
Example:
W310-1> show l2-stack-config
!#
!# Upload time: Unavailable Unavailable
!# System description: Avaya Inc. - W310
!# IP address, netmask: 149.49.32.134 255.255.255.0
!# Master position: 1
!# Number of modules: 1
!# set spantree disable set intermodule port redundancy 1/1 1/2 on gregory set arp-tx-interval 0 set logging file enable set time client disable set time server 0.0.0.0
set logout 0 hostname "W310"
!#
!# End of Configuration File
show mac address authorized list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show mac address authorized list command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings. This table displays up to 16 entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show mac address authorized list
82 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 7
Example:
W310-1(super)# show mac address authorized list
Display 1 rows
MAC Address Access
--------------- -----------------
00.04.d0.af.12.04 deny
Related Commands:
•
Use mac-address-authorized-list
command to add or remove a MAC
address from the authorized list of devices.
• Use the
mac-address-authorized-list-default
to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.
show mac-aging
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show mac-aging command to display the current status of the MAC aging function.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show mac-aging
Example:
W310-1> show mac-aging mac aging application is disabled
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.
• Use the
command to set the MAC aging time in minutes.
• Use the
command to display the MAC aging time in minutes.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 83
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
show mac-aging-time
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show mac-aging-time command to display the MAC aging time in minutes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show mac-aging-time
! The displayed value is the aging time lower limit. The actual aging time can be up to 2 minutes longer.
Example:
W310-1> show mac-aging-time
MAC aging time is 5 (min.)
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.
• Use the
command to set the MAC aging time in minutes.
• Use the
command to display the current status of the MAC aging
function.
show vlan
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show vlan command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show vlan
84 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Example:
W310-1> show vlan
VLAN ID Vlan-name
------- --------------------------------
1 v1
5 V5
10 V10
15 V15
20 V20
25 V25
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to delete an existing VLAN.
• Use the
command to configure VLANs.
Chapter 7
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 85
Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands
86 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
LAP and Radio Card Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the light access points
(LAPs) and LAP Radio Cards connected to the W310:
•
•
•
automatic-channel-selection-band
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show rogue ap authorized mac list
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 87
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
apply-template
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, Lap-template
Use the apply-template command to apply a template with the current configuration to a radio card.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: apply-template
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
W310-1# apply-template
Done!
88 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
assoc-response-timeout
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the assoc-response-timeout command to specify the number of time units
(TU) an associated station should wait for a transmitted association request MAC
Management PDU (MMPDU). If the association does not occur during the specified timeout period, then it is assumed that the association failed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the transmitted association request period to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] assoc-response-timeout <timeout>
Syntax
timeout
Description
Number of time units. The range is 1 to 4294967294.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the transmitted association request period:
(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# assoc-response-
timeout 2
Done!
To return to the default transmitted association request period:
(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no assoc-response-
timeout
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 89
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
automatic-channel-selection-band
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the automatic-channel-selection-allowed-band command to configure the frequency bands that the automatic channel selection feature will scan through.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: automatic-channel-selection-band <lower-middle | lowermiddle-high>
Syntax
lower-middle | lower-middle-high
Description
The following lists the bands and channels for each selection:
lower-middle - U-NII Lower Band equals 5.15 to 5.25 GHz
(channels 36, 40, 44, 48), and, U-NII Middle Band equals 5.25 to
5.35 GHz (channels 52, 56, 60, 64)
lower-middle-high - U-NII Lower Band equals 5.15 to 5.25
GHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48), U-NII Middle Band equals 5.25 to 5.35 GHz (channels 52, 56, 60, 64), U-NII High Band equals
5.725 to 5.825 GHz (channels 149, 153, 157, 161)
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the automatic channel selection allowed band:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# automatic-
channel-selection-band lower-middle
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
90 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
beacon-period
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the beacon-period command to specify the number of time units (TU) that a station
(AP) will use for scheduling beacon transmissions. Use the [no] form of this command to return the beacon period to its default value of 12.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] beacon-period <period>
Syntax
<period>
Description
Number of TUs a station will use to schedule beacon transmissions. This value is transmitted in beacon and probe response frames. The range is 1 to 65535. The default setting is
12.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the beacon period:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# beacon-period
900
Done!
To return to the default unicast transmission rate:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no beacon-
period
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 91
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
change-lap-name
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: LAP
Use the change-lap-name command to change the existing LAP name to a new one. See
show lap parameters
for <name>. The name must be unique.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lap-change-name <name>
Syntax
<name>
Description
New LAP name that you want to use. The name must be unique.
Example:
W310-1(super/port 01)# change-lap-name lobby
Done!
W310-1(super/lobby)#
92 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
channel-frequency
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the channel-frequency command to specify the current frequency channel for
802.11a only. The following chart shows the range of channels for 802.11a. There are five sets of frequency bands that determine the available channels depending on the regulatory domain. Some countries restrict 802.11a operation to specific frequency bands.
Allowable Channels for 802.11a/b/g Table:
Regulatory
Domain or
Country Code
Frequency
Bands
Allowed
Channels
USA (FCC) L, M, U,
ISM
In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,
36 - 5.18 GHz
40 - 5.20 GHz
44, 48, 52, 56, 44 - 5.22 GHz
60, 64, 149, 153, 48 - 5.24 GHz
157, 161, 165 52 - 5.26 GHz
56 - 5.28 GHz
In 802.11b/g mode: 1 - 11
60 - 5.30 GHz
64 - 5.32 GHz
149 - 5.745 GHz
153 - 5.765 GHz
157 - 5.785 GHz
161 - 5.805 GHz
165 - 5.825 GHz
Europe (ETSI) L and M In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,
44, 48, 52, 56,
60, 64
In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13
36 - 5.18 GHz
40 - 5.20 GHz
44 - 5.22 GHz
48 - 5.24 GHz
52 - 5.26 GHz
56 - 5.28 GHz
60 - 5.30 GHz
64 - 5.32 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
12 - 2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 93
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Regulatory
Domain or Country
Code
Frequency
Bands
Japan (TELEC) L
Allowed
Channels
In 802.11a mode: 34, 38,
42, 46
In 802.11b mode: 1 - 14
In 802.11g mode: 1 - 13
In 802.11b/g mode: 1 - 13
34 - 5.17 GHz
38 - 5.19 GHz
42 - 5.21 GHz
46 - 5.23 GHz
Singapore (IDA) L, U, and
ISM
In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,
36 - 5.18 GHz
40 - 5.20 GHz
44, 48, 149, 153, 44 - 5.22 GHz
157, 161, 165 48 - 5.24 GHz
149 - 5.745 GHz
In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13
153 - 5.765 GHz
157 - 5.785 GHz
161 - 5.805 GHz
Asia U 149 - 5.745 GHz mode: 149, 153,
157, 161
153 - 5.765 GHz
157 - 5.785 GHz
161 - 5.805 GHz
In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
12 - 2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
12 - 2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz 12 -
2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
12 - 2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
14 - 2.477 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
12 - 2.467 GHz
13 - 2.472 GHz
94 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Regulatory
Domain or Country
Code
Frequency
Bands
Allowed
Channels
Taiwan (TW) M, U, and ISM In 802.11a mode: 56, 60,
64, 149, 153,
157, 161, 165
In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 11
56 - 5.28 GHz
60 - 5.30 GHz
64 - 5.32 GHz
149 - 5.745 GHz
153 - 5.765 GHz
157 - 5.785 GHz
161 - 5.805 GHz
165 - 5.825 GHz
1 - 2.412 GHz
2 - 2.417 GHz
3 - 2.422 GHz
4 - 2.427 GHz
5 - 2.432 GHz
6 - 2.437 GHz
7 - 2.442 GHz
8 - 2.447 GHz
9 - 2.452 GHz
10 - 2.457 GHz
11 - 2.462 GHz
Frequency Band Table
Frequency
Band
Lower Band
(36 = default)
Middle Band
(52 = default)
H Band
Channel
ID
60
100
104
108
48
52
56
58
40
42
44
46
34
36
38
128
132
136
140
112
116
120
124
FCC
(GHz)
5.240
5.260
5.280
5.300
5.320
—
—
—
—
5.180
—
5.200
—
5.220
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ETSI
(GHz)
5.240
5.260
5.280
5.300
5.320
5.500
5.520
5.540
—
5.180
—
5.200
—
5.220
—
5.560
5.580
5.600
5.620
5.640
5.660
5.680
5.700
—
5.230
—
—
—
—
—
—
MKK
(GHz)
5.170
1
—
5.190
—
5.210
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SG
(GHz)
5.240
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5.180
—
5.200
—
5.220
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TW
(GHz)
—
5.260
5.280
5.300
5.320
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ASIA
(GHz)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 95
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Frequency
Band
Channel
ID
FCC
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
SG
(GHz)
ASIA
(GHz)
TW
(GHz)
Upper Band
(149 = default)
149
153
157
161
5.745
5.675
5.785
5.805
—
—
—
—
ISM Band
165 5.825
—
Note 1: Channel 34 is the default channel for Japan
—
—
—
—
—
5.745
5.675
5.785
5.805
5.825
5.745
5.675
5.785
5.805
—
5.745
5.675
5.785
5.805
5.825
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the current 802.11a frequency channel to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] channel-frequency
<index>
Syntax
<index>
Description
Current operating frequency channel. Valid channels are shown in the tables above.
• 802.11a default: Channel 48
• 802.11bg default: Channel 3
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
96 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To set the current 802.11a frequency channel, specify the channel number (use the table above for assistance):
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channel-
frequency 36
Done!
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)#
To return to the default 802.11a frequency channel:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no channel-
frequency
Done!
channel-selection
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Context: Radio card, Template
Use the channel-selection command to enable or disable the automatic frequency channel feature for the wireless interface. When enabled, you cannot set the frequency channel. The default is enabled. Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of enabled.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] channel-selection <auto | selective>
Syntax
auto selective
Description
Selects the channel frequency for the LAP automatically.
Lets you select the channel frequency for the LAP. After you use this command, you must use the channel-frequency command to select the channel.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 97
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP will need to reboot in order for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To enable automatic channel selection:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelselection auto
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
To disable automatic channel selection:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelselection selective
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Done!
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelfrequency 1
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
clear statistics
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: LAP, Radio card
Use the clear statistics command to clear all the Light Access Point (LAP’s) general radio counters/statistics. This includes the following:
• Number of Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) errors
• Number of successfully transmitted MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDUs) belonging to a fragmented MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU)
• Number of MPDUs received that belong to a fragmented MSDU
• Number of successfully transmitted multicast MSDUs
• Number of multicast MSDUs received
• Number of failed transmitted MSDUs because the number of retries reached its limit
98 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
• Number of MSDUs successfully transmitted with more than one or more retry attempts
• Number of duplicate frames received
• Number of Request To Send (RTS) were transmitted without a Clear To Send (CTS) response
• Number of transmission attempts that ended without an ACK (acknowledgement)
• Number of Frame Check Sequence (FCS) errors detected
• Number of successfully transmitted MSDUs
• Number of received MSDUs
• Number of decryption errors
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear-statistics [general-radio-statistics]
Syntax
[general-radiostatistics]
Description
The specific LAP counter or statistic that you want to clear.
If you do not specify a counter or statistic, all of the statistics listed above are cleared.
Example:
To clear all counters and statistics:
W310-1(super)#clear-statistics
Done!
To clear a specific counter or statistic:
W310-1(super)#clear-statistics decryption-failed-counter
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 99
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
copy tftp LAP_image
Use the copy tftp LAP_image command to download the Light Access Point (LAP) image to the W310.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: copy tftp LAP_image <filename> <bank_value>
Syntax
<filename>
<bank_value>
Description
Filename of the LAP image.
Set to either bank-A or bank-B.
Example:
W310-1(super)#copy tftp LAP_image AP600 c:\lap_image01
149.49.66.17 bank-a
Beginning download operation ...
This operation may take a few minutes...
Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.
disable-lap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the disable-lap command to shut down the power to all LAPs or a specified LAP.
Syntax:
disable-lap {all | <name>
}
100
Syntax
all
<name>
Description
Shuts down the power to all LAPs in the domain.
Shuts down the power for the specified LAP. The LAP name is the assigned Network Name.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
W310-1(super)# disable-lap all
This command will shutdown the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
dtim-period
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the dtim-period command to specify the number of beacon intervals that will elapse between transmission of beacon frames containing a Traffic Indicator Message (TIM) element whose Delivery Traffic Indicator Message (DTIM) count field is 0.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the DTIM period to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] dtim-period <period>
Syntax
<period>
Description
Number of beacon intervals. The range is 1 to 255 intervals. The default value is 1.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 101
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the number of DTIM periods:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# dtim-period 3
Done!
To return to the default DTIM periods:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no dtim-period
Done!
fragmentation-threshold
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the fragmentation-threshold command to set the fragmentation threshold for
MAC Service Data Units (MSDUs).
When transmitting a packet over a wireless network, sometimes the packet is broken into several segments, if the size of packet exceeds that allowed by the network. The
fragmentation threshold defines the number of bytes used for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. Fragmentation threshold increases the transfer reliability by cutting a
MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) into smaller size MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDU). For this command, specify the MPDU maximum size, in octets, that may be delivered to the
PHY. An MSDU is broken into fragments if its size exceeds this attribute’s value after adding MAC headers and trailers.
Use the [no] form of this command to set the fragmentation threshold to its default.
102 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] fragmentation-threshold <threshold>
Syntax
<threshold>
Description
Size of the fragmentation threshold. The default value is 2346.
The range for this value is 256 to 2346.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the fragmentation threshold:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# fragmentation-
threshold 280
Done!
To return to the default fragmentation threshold:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no
fragmentation-threshold
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 103
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
lap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the lap command to enter the LAP command mode so that you can configure the specified LAP. LAP is associated with the W310 port.
Warning: You must enter the name with the word port- and the port number. For example, the W110 connected to port 15 on the W310 would be port-15 as the LAP name.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lap <lap-name>
Syntax
<lap-name>
Description
LAP name for the LAP that you want to configure.
Example:
W310-1(super)# lap port-01
W310-1(super/LAP port-01)#
104 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
lap-base-ip-address
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the lap-base-ip-address command to change the LAP’s IP address if your subnet uses a 13.13.13.x subnet.
Caution: This command is only used when you have a 13.13.13.x subnet. You must only use this command when this conflict occurs.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lap-base-ip-address <ip-address>
Syntax
<ip-address>
Description
Current LAP location or the new LAP location.
Example:
W310-1(super)# lap-base-ip-address 1.1.1.0
You should copy running configuration to startup and reset the module in order that the change become effective.
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 105
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
lap-location
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: LAP
Use the lap-location command to set or change the LAP location. Refer to show-lap
parameters for the name parameter. The name must be unique.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lap-location <location>
Syntax
<location>
Description
Current LAP location or the new LAP location.
Example:
W310-1(super)# lap-location 23rdfloor
Done!
lap-template
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the lap-template command to enter the LAP template configuration mode. Makes it possible for you to apply a template to the specified LAP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lap-template <name>
Syntax
<name>
Description
LAP name to which you want to apply the default template. For a list of LAPs, use the show-lap command. The name is up to
32 characters. The default lap template name is Default.
106 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
W310-1(super)# lap-template marketing
W310-1(super/802.1 marketing template)#
Related Commands:
apply-template applies the template file for a specific configuration to the LAP.
lb-adj-ap-time-difference
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the lb-adj-ap-time-difference command to set the load balancing maximum allowed processing time difference between adjacent AP’s packet transmissions. Use the
[no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] lb-adj-ap-time-difference <threshold>
Syntax
<threshold>
Description
Set the maximum allowed transmission processing time between
APs. The range is 100 to 1000000 milliseconds. The default value is 1000000.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 107
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
To set the maximum allowed difference for transmission processing time between adjacent
APs to a value other than the default:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# lb-adj-ap-
time-difference 200
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
To return to the default value of 100 milliseconds:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no lb-adj-ap-
time-difference
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
lb-mode
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the lb-mode command to enable or disable load balancing. Load balancing is used in radio wireless LANs to prevent any one Access Point from becoming responsible for too much network traffic. When multiple Access Points are installed and several nodes are competing to send data to them, load balancing ensures that all of the Access Points work together to move the data across the wireless LAN. The default value is disabled.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to its default value of enabled.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: lb-mode <active | not-active>
Syntax
<active>
<not-active>
Description
Enables load balancing for the Access Point interface.
Disables load balancing for the Access Point interface.
108 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To send the SSID attributes to a LAP:
W310-1(super)# lb-mode active
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
To return the LAP to the default SSID attributes:
W310-1(super)# no lb-mode
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
lb-tx-time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the lb-tx-time command to set the maximum allowed processing time to transmit packets. This is measured from the time a packet enters an Access Point from the W310 until it successfully exits the AP’s radio.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of 1000000.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] lb-tx-time <threshold>
Syntax
<threshold>
Description
Set the maximum allowed transmission processing time in milliseconds. The range is 100 to 1000000 milliseconds. The default value is 1000000.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 109
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the load balancing maximum allowed transmission processing time to a value other than the default:
W310-1(super)# lb-tx-time 900
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
To restore the default value of 100 for the load balancing maximum allowed transmission processing time:
W310-1(super)# no lb-tx-time
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
long-retry-limit
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the long-retry-limit command to specify the maximum number of transmission attempts that will be made by a frame before a failure is indicated. This setting is for frames that are greater than the RTS threshold number of bytes.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the long retry limit to its default.
110 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] long-retry-limit <limit>
Syntax
<limit>
Description
Maximum number of attempts to be made in time units (TU).
The range is 1 through 4294967295. The default value is 4.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the long retry limit:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# long-retry-
limit 50
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
To restore the default long retry limit:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no long-retry-
limit
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 111
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
max-rx-lifetime
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the max-rx-lifetime command to specify the elapsed time in time units (TU) after the initial receipt of a fragmented MAC Management Protocol Data Unit (MMPDU) or
MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) that will terminate any further attempt to reassemble the
MMPDU or MSDU.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the elapsed time to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] max-rx-lifetime
<time>
Syntax
<time>
Description
Elapsed time in time units. The default is 256. The range for this value is 1 through 4294967295.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the maximum elapsed time:
CW310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# max-rx-
lifetime 200
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
112 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
To restore the default maximum elapsed time:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no max-rx-
lifetime
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Chapter 8
Done!
max-tx-msdu-lifetime
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the max-tx-msdu-lifetime command to specify the elapsed time in time units
(TU) after the first MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) transmission attempt that will result in the termination of further MSDU retransmission attempts.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the elapsed time to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] max-tx-msdu-lifetime
<time>
Syntax
<time>
Description
Maximum MSDU transmission time in time units. The default is
512. The range for this value is 1 through 4294967295 time units.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 113
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
To set the maximum MSDU transmission time:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# max-tx-msdu-
lifetime 200
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
To restore the default maximum MSDU transmission time:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no max-tx-
msdu-lifetime
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
multicast-tx-rate
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the multicast-tx-rate command to set the multicast rate for the network interface card. This command is dependent on the type of wireless network interface card
(NIC), including 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g. This command is used for beacons, frames used for Clear To Send (CTS), and other multicast and broadcast frames. Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] multicast-tx-rate <rate>
114 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Syntax
<rate>
Description
The multicast rate. Applicable rates (in megabytes) are as follows:
• 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54
• 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 (2 is the default)
When the distance between APs is set to small, minicell, or
microcell, the multicast rates can be set to:
— 22 for 11 Mbit/s
— 11 for 5.5 Mbit/s
— 4 for 2 Mbit/s
— 2 for 1 Mbit
When the distance between APs is set to medium, the multicast rates can be set to:
— 11 for 5.5 Mbit/s
— 4 for 2 Mbit/s
— 2 for 1 Mbit
When the distance between APs is set to large, the multicast rates can be set to:
— 4 for 2 Mbit/s
— 2 for 1 Mbit
• 802.11b/g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12 18, 24, 36, 48, 54
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the multicast rate to another value:
W310-1(super)# multicast-tx-rate 11
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 115
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
To return to the default value of 2 Mbit/s per second (4):
W310-1(super)# no multicast-tx-rate
The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
operational-mode
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, LAP
Use the operational-mode command to configure the operation mode for the wireless network interface.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] operational-mode {802.11b | 802.11bg | 802.11a | 802.11g}
Syntax
{802.11b |
802.11bg |
802.11a |
802.11g}
Description
Operation mode for the wireless network interface cards.
• 802.11a (default)
• 802.11b
• 802.11bg
• 802.11g
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
116 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To set the operational mode:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# operational-
mode 802.11a
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
power-up-lap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the power-up-lap command to power up the Light Access Point(s) (LAP(s)) by turning on the power to all the LAPs or a specified LAP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: power-up-lap <all | <name>}
Syntax
all
<name>
Description
Powers up all LAPs in your domain.
Name of the LAP you want to power up. The LAP name is the assigned Network Name.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 117
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# power-up-lap all
Load detection process on port 1 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 2 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 3 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 4 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 5 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 6 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 7 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 8 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 9 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 10 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 11 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 12 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 13 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 14 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 15 is enabled.
Load detection process on port 16 is enabled.
Done!
118 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
radio-card-802.11
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: LAP
Use the radio-card-802.11 command to enter the 802.11-radio card command mode.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: radio-card-802.11 <type> <location>
Syntax
<type>
<location>
Description
Specify the radio card type as:
• 802.11a for 802.11a
• 802.11g for 802.11g
The card slot on the AP:
• first-slot
• second-slot
Example:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby)# radio-card-802.11 802.11a first-
slot
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 119
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
radio-card-template
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Lap-template
Use the radio-card-template command to enter the radio card template command mode. The radio card types are 802.11a and 802.11g.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: radio-card-template <type>
Syntax
<type>
Description
Specify the radio card type as:
• a for 802.11a
• g for 802.11g
Example:
Enter the radio card template from the LAP template as follows:
W310-1 (super/802.1 default template)# radio-card-802.11
802.11g
W310-1 (super/802.1 default template/802.11g) #
120 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
reboot-lap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the reboot-lap command to reboot the Light Access Point LAP(s) by shutting down the power to the LAP(s) and turning the power back on. You can reset all the LAPs in your domain or specify a LAP to reboot. The LAP will maintain its configuration.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: reboot-lap all | <lap_name>}
Syntax
all
<lap_name>
Description
Reboots all the LAPs in your domain.
Name of the LAP you want to reboot. The name must be the
LAP’s assigned Network Name.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 121
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# reboot-lap all
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Reboot LAP connected to port 1
Reboot LAP connected to port 2
LAP isn’t connected to port 3
LAP isn’t connected to port 4
Reboot LAP connected to port 5
Reboot LAP connected to port 6
LAP isn’t connected to port 7
LAP isn’t connected to port 8
....
restore-lap-to-template
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, LAP
Use the restore-lap-to-template command to restore the LAP or LAPs to the default template attributes. You can restore all the LAPs in your domain or restore only the
LAP for the LAP mode you are in.
Warning: You will lose the configuration information currently stored on the LAP(s) if you use this command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: restore-lap-to-template <all>
Syntax
all
Description
Restores all the Light Access Points in your domain to the default template attributes.
122 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To restore all LAPs to the template:
W310-1(super)# restore-lap-to-template all
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Example:
To restore a specific LAP, you must be in the LAP’s mode.
W310-1(super)# lap port-01
W310-1(super/lap port-01)# restore-lap-to-template
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
restore-to-factory-default
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Lap Template
Use the restore-to-factory-default command to restore the template to the factory default settings and reset all LAPs. This restores all devices to the factory default template.
Warning: You will lose the configuration information currently stored on the LAP if you use this command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: restore-to-factory-default
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 123
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
W310-1(super/802.1 default template)# restore-lap-factory-
default
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
rogue-ap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the rogue-ap-status command to enable or disable the rogue Access Point detection service in the device. Use of [no] form of this command to return to the default of disabled.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] rogue-ap <active | not-active>
Syntax
<active>
<not-active>
Description
Enables rogue Access Point detection.
Disables rogue Access Point detection.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
124 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To enable the rogue AP status detection service:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rogue-ap
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue?
Done!
Related Commands:
• rogue-ap-interval sets the interval at which the rogue Access Point detection feature will initialize.
• rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list lets you view, add or remove the MAC address for a valid Access Point MAC list.
rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list command to add or remove a Media Access
Control (MAC) address to or from the valid rogue Access Point (AP) MAC list. A rogue AP is an unauthorized AP within a given coverage area.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list add | remove <mac-address>
Syntax
add | remove
<mac-address>
Description
Add or remove the specified AP MAC address. Table may contain up to 10000 entries.
Specific MAC address for the Access Point you want to add or remove from the authorized list.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 125
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
W310-1# rogue-ap-valid-mac-list add 00:04:d0:af:bb:1e
Done!
W310-1#
Related Commands:
Use the
show rogue ap authorized mac list to display the list of authorized
APs by their MAC addresses.
rogue-ap-interval
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the rogue-ap-interval command to set the interval at which the rogue Access
Point (AP) detection feature initializes. APs are then scanned at the specified interval.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to its default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] rogue-ap-interval <interval>
Syntax
<interval>
Description
Interval in seconds that the APs are scanned. The range is from
15 to 1440 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
126 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To set the rogue AP interval:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rogue-ap-
interval 900
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
To restore the default of 15 seconds for the rogue AP interval:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no rogue-ap-
interval
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 127
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
rts-threshold
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the rts-threshold to specify the packet size of a Request To Send (RTS) transmission. This setting helps control traffic flow through an Access Point, especially one with many clients.
Specify the number of bytes in an MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDU) below which an RTS/
CTS handshake will not be performed.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default RTS threshold.
Syntax:
[no] rts-threshold <threshold>
Syntax
<threshold>
Description
Number of bytes. The default value is 2347.
• If this value is set to 0 (zero), then RTS/CTS handshake is turned on for all data and management frames transmitted by the station.
• If this value is set to a number greater than 2347, then RTS/
CTS handshake is turned off for all data and management frames transmitted by the station.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
128 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To set the RTS threshold:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rts-threshold
100
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
To return to the default setting:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no rts-
threshold
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
set LAP boot bank
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the set LAP boot bank command to set the LAP boot bank from which the system boots.
Syntax:
set LAP boot bank <platform> bank-A | bank-B | auto
Syntax
<platform> bank-A bank-B auto
Description
Use LAP for platform.
Boot bank from which to boot up the system.
System automatically selects the boot bank from which to boot up the system. This is the default.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 129
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# set LAP boot bank bank-B
Done!
short-retry-limit
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the short-retry-limit command to specify the maximum number of transmission attempts that will be made for a frame before a failure is indicated. This setting is for frames that are less than or equal to the Request To Send (RTS) threshold number of bytes.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default short retry limit.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] short-retry-limit <limit>
Syntax
<limit>
Description
Maximum number of attempts to be made. The default value is
7. The range is 1 through 255.
130
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the short retry limit:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-retry-
limit 100
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
To restore the default value for short retry limit:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-
retry-limit
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)
Chapter 8
short-slot-time-implemented
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the short-slot-time-implemented command to enable or disable the Short
Slot Time option. The short-slot-time option is used with 802.11g radio cards only and allows you to maximize throughput. Radio cards in a mixed mode (such as 802.11b/g) cannot use the short slot time. The default is disabled.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the short slot time to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] short-slot-time-implemented <active | not-active>
Syntax
<active>
<not-active>
Description
Enables the short slot time option for the 802.11g interface.
Disables the short slot time option for the 802.11g interface.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 131
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
To implement the short time slot:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-slot-
time-implemented active
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)
To restore the default setting which does not implement a short slot time:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-slot-
time-implemented
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)
short-slot-time-status
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the short-slot-time-status command to indicate whether the Short Slot Time status is enabled. The default is disabled.
Use the [no] form of this command restores the default short slot time status.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] short-slot-time-status
Syntax
<active>
<not-active>
Description
Enables the short slot time status for the LAP interface.
Disables the short slot time status for the LAP interface.
132
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
Example:
To enable the short slot time status:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-slot-
time-status active
Done!
To restore the default short slot time status of disabled:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-slot-
time-status
Done!
show lap parameters
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, LAP, Radio Card, Template
Use the show lap parameters command to display the Light Access Point (LAP) parameters for the W310 port. Displays the LAP parameters, including the following.
• LAP name
• Location
• Description
• Current Up Time for the LAP
• Physical port number
• LAP hardware version.
• LAP software image version
• LAP bootloader version
• Upgrade to bootloader version
• MAC address
• AP group name, and
• LAP details that include the following.
— LAP name
— LAP location
— LAP’s SpectraLink Voice over IP (VoIP) status
— Emergency location identification number
— LAP Radio card type and location
— General radio statistics
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 133
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show-lap-parameters [<name>] [details]
Syntax
[<name>]
[details]
Description
Name assigned to the LAP.
Details for the LAP parameters.
Example:
W310-1 (super) # show-lap-parameters show lap parameters
LAP's General Attributes:
Lap Name port-01
Lap Description Avaya Wireless Light AP
Lap Location N/A
Physical Port Number 1
Hardware Version N/A
Software Image Version N/A
Original Boot Loader Version N/A
Upgrade Boot Loader Version N/A
Up Time N/A
Current Operational Mode 802.11a
LAP's General Attributes:
Lap Name port-02
Lap Description Avaya Wireless Light AP
Lap Location N/A
Physical Port Number 2
Hardware Version 58.0.0
Software Image Version 1.1.12
Original Boot Loader Version 1.1.1
Upgrade Boot Loader Version 255.255.255
Up Time 50264230
Current Operational Mode 802.11a
.........
134 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
show rogue ap authorized mac list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show rogue ap authorized-mac-list to display the list of authorized
APs by their MAC addresses.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show rogue ap authorized mac list
Example:
W310-1(super)# show rogue ap authorized mac list
Display 2 rows
MAC Address
-------------------
00:03:e1:af:bb:1e
00:03:e2:ae:bc:1f
W310-1(super)#
Related Commands:
Use rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list
command to add or remove a Media Access
Control (MAC) address to or from the valid rogue Access Point (AP) MAC list.
show template parameters
Use the show template parameters command to display the template parameters and attributes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show template parameters
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 135
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# show template parameters
Current operational mode 802.11g
Template's Parameters
----------------------------------------------------------
802.11a 802.11g
---------------------------------------------------------channel-selection auto auto channel-frequency ACS ACS automatic-channel-selection-band low-mid low-mid tx-power-level 10000 10000 short-slot-time-implemented N/A enable short-slot-time-status N/A disable multicast-tx-rate 0 0 rogue-ap-status disable disable rogue-ap-interval 7200 7200 lb-mode enable enable lb-tx-time 1000000 1000000 lb-adj-ap-time-difference 100 100 assoc-response-timeout 0 0 dtim-period 1 1 beacon-period 100 100
--type q to quit or space key to continue-rts-threshold 2347 2347 short-retry-limit 7 7 long-retry-limit 4 4 fragmentation-threshold 2346 2346 max-tx-msdu-lifetime 512 512 max-rx-lifetime 512 512
W310-1(super)#
136 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
spectralink-compatible-phone
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the spectralink-compatible-phone command to enable or disable the
SpectraLink Voice over IP (VoIP) feature for all LAPs.
Use the [no] form of this command to disable SpectraLink VoIP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] spectralink-compatible-phone <supported | not-supported>
Syntax
supported not-supported
Description
Enables support for SpectraLink Voice over IP.
Disables support for SpectraLink Voice over IP.
! It is recommended that you reboot all the W110s (or LAPs) connected to the W310 once you enable support for SpectraLink or SpectraLink-compatible phones.
Example:
To enable the SpectraLink VoIP feature:
W310-1(super)# spectralink-compatible-phone supported
Done!
To disable the SpectraLink VoIP feature:
W310-1(super)# no spectralink-compatible-phone
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 137
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
ssid
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, Radio card, Template
Use the ssid command to send the service set identifier (SSID) attributes to the Light
Access Point (LAP).
Use the [no] form of this command to remove the SSID name.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ssid <name>
Syntax
<name>
Description
Name of the Light Access Point to which you want to send the
SSID attributes.
Message:
For Radio card mode only:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. This keeps the SSID name at its present value.
Example:
To send the SSID attributes to a LAP:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# ssid lobby
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
To restore the default SSID attributes to a LAP:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no ssid lobby
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
138 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 8
tx-power-level
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the tx-power-level command to control transmit power within an Independent
Basic Service Set (IBSS). The LAP will allow four intervals of transmit power control.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default transmit power level.
Syntax:
[no] tx-power-level
<power>
Syntax
power
Description
Level of transmit power control.
For the LAP, the settings include:
• 1250
• 2500
• 5000
• 10000 (default)
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the transmit power level:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# tx-power-level
1250
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 139
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
To restore the default transmit power level:
W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no tx-power-
level
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
unicast-tx-rate
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Radio card, Template
Use the unicast-tx-rate command to set the transmit rate for unicast traffic for the wireless interface. This command is dependent on the transmit rates supported by the wireless interface.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of 0 (Auto Fallback).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] unicast-tx-rate <rate>
140 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Syntax
<rate>
Chapter 8
Description
Unicast transmit rate. The default value of zero (0) is auto fallback. The values of this parameter are given in units of
500 kbps.
• For 802.11b:
— 0 = Auto Fallback
— 2 = 1 Mbps
— 4 = 2 Mbps
— 11 = 5.5 Mbps
— 22 = 11 Mbps
• For 802.11a:
— 0 = Auto Fallback
— 12 = 6 Mbps
— 18 = 9 Mbps
— 24 = 12 Mbps
— 36 = 18 Mbps
— 48 = 24 Mbps
— 72 = 36 Mbps
— 96 = 48 Mbps
— 108 = 54 Mbps
• For 802.11a with Turbo Mode:
— 0 = Auto Fallback
— 24 = 12 Mbps
— 36 = 18 Mbps
— 48 = 24 Mbps
— 72 = 36 Mbps
— 96 = 48 Mbps
— 144 = 72 Mbps
— 192 = 96 Mbps
— 216 = 108 Mbps
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 141
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
142
Syntax
rate
(continued)
Description
• For 802.11g in 802.11g mode only:
— 0 = Auto Fallback
— 12 = 6 Mbps
— 18 = 9 Mbps
— 24 = 12 Mbps
— 36 = 18 Mbps
— 48 = 24 Mbps
— 72 = 36 Mbps
— 96 = 48 Mbps
— 108 = 54 Mbps
• For 802.11g in 802.11b/g mode:
— 0 = Auto Fallback
— 2 = 1 Mbps
— 4 = 2 Mbps
— 11 = 5.5 Mbps
— 12 = 6 Mbps
— 18 = 9 Mbps
— 22 = 11 Mbps
— 24 = 12 Mbps
— 36 = 18 Mbps
— 48 = 24 Mbps
— 72 = 36 Mbps
— 96 = 48 Mbps
— 108 = 54 Mbps
2 of 2
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
To set the unicast transmission rate:
W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# unicast-tx-
rate 48
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
To restore the default unicast transmission rate:
W310-1(super)# no unicast-tx-rate
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Chapter 8
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 143
Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands
144 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Logging and RMON Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure logging and RMON:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set logging server access-level
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show logging session condition
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 145
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
clear log
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear log command to delete the log file of a switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear log [<module>]
Syntax
[module]
Description
1
Example:
W310-1# clear log
Cleared all logfiles.
146 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
clear logging file
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear logging file command to delete the log file, including the history log, and open an empty one.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear logging file
Example:
W310-1# clear logging file
Done!
clear logging server
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear logging server command to delete a Syslog server from the Syslog server table.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear logging server {<ip-address> | <hostname>}
Syntax
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
Example:
W310-1# clear logging server 149.49.38.22
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 147
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Related Commands:
Use the
command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages.
clear rmon statistics
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear rmon statistics command to clear all RMON statistics from the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear rmon statistics
Example:
W310-1# clear rmon statistics cleared device counters
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display RMON statistics.
clear utilization cpu
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear utilization cpu command to disable CPU utilization monitoring on the specified module.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear utilization cpu <module-number>
Syntax
module-number
Description
1
148 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Example:
W310-1# clear utilization cpu 1
CPU utilization is cleared on module 1
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.
• Use the
command to display CPU and RAM usage.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 149
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
rmon alarm
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the rmon alarm command to create a new RMON alarm entry. Use the no rmon alarm
command to delete an existing RMON alarm entry.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: rmon alarm <Alarm Number> <variable> <interval> <sample type> rising-threshold <rising threshold> <rising event> fallingthreshold <falling threshold> <falling event> <startup alarm>
<owner> no rmon alarm <Alarm Index>
Syntax
<Alarm Number>
<variable>
<interval>
<sample type>
<rising threshold>
<rising event>
<falling threshold>
<falling event>
<startup alarm>
<owner>
Description
This is the alarm index number of this entry (it is advisable to use the same interface number as your alarm index number.)
This is the MIB variable which will be sampled by the alarm entry.
The interval between 2 samples.
This can be set to either delta (the difference between 2 samples) or an absolute value.
This sets the upper threshold for the alarm entry.
The RMON event entry that will be notified if the upper threshold is passed.
This sets the lower threshold for the alarm entry.
The RMON event entry that will be notified if the lower threshold is passed.
The instances in which the alarm will be activated. The possible parameters are: rising, falling, risingOrfalling.
Owner name string.
150 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Example:
W310-1# rmon alarm 1026 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.5.1026 60
delta rising-threshold 10000 1054 falling-threshold 10 1054 risingOrFalling gregory
alarm 1026 was created successfully
Example:
W310-1# no rmon alarm 1026
Related Commands:
command to display the settings for a specific alarm entry.
rmon event
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the rmon event command to create an RMON event entry. Use the no rmon event command to delete an existing RMON event entry.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: rmon event <Event Number> <type> description <description> owner <owner> no rmon event <Event Index>
Syntax
event number type
<description>
<owner>
Description
This is the event index number of this entry.
The type of the event. The possible parameters are:
• trap
• log
• logAndTrap
• none
A description of this event
Owner name string
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 151
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1# rmon event 1054 logAndTrap description "event for
monitoring gregory's computer" owner gregory
event 1054 was created successfully
Example:
W310-1# no rmon event 1054
Related Commands:
Use the
command to show the settings for an event entry that was
defined by the rmon event command or using the W310 Manager.
rmon history
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the rmon history command to create an RMON history entry. Use the no rmon history command to delete an existing RMON history event.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: rmon history <history index> <module/port> interval <interval> buckets <number of buckets> owner <owner name> no rmon history <History Index>
Syntax
<history index>
<module/port>
<interval>
Description
History index number of this entry (it is advisable to use the same interface number as your history index number).
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
The interval between two samples.
1 of 2
152 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Syntax Description
<number of buckets> The number of buckets defined.
<owner name> The owner name string.
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1# rmon history 1026 1/2 interval 30 buckets 20 owner
amir
history 1026 was created successfully
Example:
W310-1# no rmon history 1026
Related Commands:
Use the
show rmon history command to display the most recent RMON history log for
a specific history index.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 153
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
set logging file condition
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging file condition command to define a filter for logging messages to the logging file.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging file condition {all | <application>} {none |
<severity>}
Syntax
all
Description
A keyword signifying that logging messages from all applications are logged to the logging file.
1 of 3
154 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Syntax
<application> none
Chapter 9
Description
The application from which logging messages are logged to the logging file. Possible values are:
• Boot
• System
• ROUTER
• CONFIG
• TEMP
• FILESYS
• FAN
• SUPPLY
• SECURITY
• CASCADE
• QOS
• SWITCHFABRIC
• LAG
• VLAN
• OSPF
• RIP
• SNMP
• POLICY
• CLI
• STP
• ATM
• WAN
• THRESHOLD
A keyword signifying that logging messages are logged to the logging file regardless of the severity of the message.
2 of 3
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 155
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Syntax
<severity>
Description
The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged to the logging file. The severity is represented by an integer.
Possible values are:
• 0 – Emergency
• 1 – Alert
• 2 – Critical
• 3 – Error
• 4 – Warning
• 5 – Notification
• 6 – Informational
• 7 – Debugging
3 of 3
Example:
W310-1# set logging file condition 6 2
Done!
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the condition and
filtering of the log file.
set logging file
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging file disable command to enable or disable logging messages to a logging file.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging file {enable | disable}
Example:
W310-1# set logging file disable
Done!
156 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Example:
W310-1# set logging file enable
Done!
set logging server
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages. A maximum of three Syslog servers can be configured.
After defining the Syslog server, you must enable logging of system messages to it. To enable logging of system messages to a Syslog server, use the
command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server <ip-address>
Syntax
<ip-address>
Description
The IP address of the Syslog server.
Example:
To define a Syslog server at IP address 147.2.3.66:
W310-1# set logging server 147.2.3.66
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to delete a Syslog server from the
Syslog server table.
• Use the
command to display the condition and filtering of logging to the Syslog server.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 157
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
set logging server access-level
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server access-level command to define the access level associated with Syslog server sink. You cannot specify an access level that is higher than the level assigned to you.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server access-level <admission-level>
{<ip-address> | <hostname>}
Syntax
<admission-level>
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The access level associated with the Syslog server sink.
Possible values are:
• read-only
• read-write
• admin
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
Example:
W310-1# set logging server access-level read-only
149.49.38.22
Done!
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the condition and
filtering of logging to the Syslog server.
158 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
set logging server condition
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server condition command to define a filter for logging messages to the Syslog server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server condition {all | <application>} {none |
<severity>} {<ip-address> | <hostname>}
Syntax
all
<application> none
Description
A keyword signifying that logging messages from all applications are logged to the Syslog server.
The application from which logging messages are logged to the
Syslog server. The application is represented by an integer.
Possible values are:
• Boot • LAG
• System
• ROUTER
• CONFIG
• TEMP
•
•
•
•
VLAN
OSPF
RIP
SNMP
• FILESYS
• FAN
• SUPPLY
• SECURITY
• CASCADE
• QOS
• SWITCHFABRIC
•
•
•
•
•
•
POLICY
CLI
STP
ATM
WAN
THRESHOLD
A keyword signifying that logging messages are logged to the
Syslog server regardless of the severity of the message.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 159
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Syntax
<severity>
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged to the Syslog server. The severity is represented by an integer.
Possible values are:
• 0 – Emergency
• 1 – Alert
• 2 – Critical
• 3 – Error
• 4 – Warning
• 5 – Notification
• 6 – Informational
• 7 – Debugging
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1# set logging server condition LAG Warning
135.64.102.224
Done!
160 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
set logging server disable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server disable command to disable logging messages to a
Syslog server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server disable {<ip-address> | <hostname>}
Syntax
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
Example:
W310-1# set logging server disable 149.49.35.21
Done!
set logging server enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server enable command to enable logging messages to a
Syslog server. To disable logging messages to a Syslog server, use the
set logging server disable command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server enable {<ip-address> | <hostname>}
Syntax
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 161
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1# set logging server enable 149.49.35.21
Done!
set logging server facility
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging server facility command to update the server facility used for sending messages to Syslog server. Server facilities are set per Syslog server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging server facility <server-facility> {<ip-address>
|<hostname>}
Syntax
<server-facility>
Description
The facility used for sending messages to the Syslog server.
Possible values are:
• kern – Kernel
• user – User processes
• mail – Electronic mail
• daemon – Background system processes
• auth – Authorization
• syslog – System logger
• lpr – Printer
• news – Usenet news
• uucp – Unix-to-Unix copy program
• clkd – Clock daemon
• sec – Security
• ftpd – FTP daemon
• ntp – NTP subsystem
• audi – Log audit
• alert – Log alert
• clkd2 – Clock daemon
• local0-local7 – Available for user defined facilities
1 of 2
162 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Syntax
<ip-address>
<hostname>
Description
The IP address of the Syslog server.
The hostname of the Syslog server.
Example:
W310-1# set logging server facility news 135.64.102.224
Done!
2 of 2
set logging session condition
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging session condition command to define a filter rule for logging messages during the current session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging session condition {all | <application>} {none |
<severity>}
Syntax
all
Description
The filter applies to logging messages from all applications.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 163
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Syntax
<application> none
<severity>
Description
The application to which the filter applies. Possible values are:
• Boot • LAG
• System
• ROUTER
• CONFIG
• TEMP
•
•
•
•
VLAN
OSPF
RIP
SNMP
• FILESYS
• FAN
• SUPPLY
• SECURITY
• CASCADE
• QOS
• SWITCHFABRIC
•
•
•
•
•
•
POLICY
CLI
STP
ATM
WAN
THRESHOLD
Messages are logged regardless of their severity.
The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged. The severity is represented by an integer. Possible values are:
• 0 – Emergency
• 1 – Alert
• 2 – Critical
• 3 – Error
• 4 – Warning
• 5 – Notification
• 6 – Informational
• 7 – Debugging
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1# set logging session condition LAG Warning
Done!
164 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
set logging session disable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging session disable command to disable logging messages in the current CLI session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging session disable
Example:
W310-1# set logging session disable
Done!
set logging session enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logging session enable command to enable logging messages in the current CLI session. To disable logging messages in the current CLI session, use the
set logging session disable command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logging session enable
Example:
W310-1# set logging session enable
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 165
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
set utilization cpu
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set utilization cpu command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set utilization cpu <module-number>
Syntax
<module-number>
Description
1
Example:
W310-1# set utilization cpu 1
CPU utilization is set on module 1
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to disable CPU utilization monitoring
on the specified module.
• Use the
command to display CPU and RAM usage.
166 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
show dev log file
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show dev log file command to display the device’s encrypted log file.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show dev log file
Example:
W310-1> show dev log file iW}ZH~YL{}Z(^E^M}=}EsZ^E}Z
ZH~YL{}Zj^M}ZZZZZZDZ(""0Ji HA
Zl{~=ZNLMR}EZZZZZZDZw
Zl~'=;^E}ZK}Esz~NZDZ@:3:<w
Z!lZjLMR}EZZZZZZZZDZw:3
ZiW}Zl^>}YZn^=^ZzsDZ
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
show log
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show log command to display an device’s encrypted reset log.
! This command is for Avaya technical support use.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show log [<mod_num>]
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 167
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1> show log 1
MODULE 1, MESSAGE 01:
00000000 0 05002966 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODULE 1, MESSAGE 02:
00000000 0 00004242 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODULE 1, MESSAGE 03:
00000000 0 00002395 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
show logging file condition
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show logging file condition command to display the condition and filtering of the log file.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show logging file condition
Example:
W310-1> show logging file condition
*********************************************************
Message logging configuration of FILE sink ***
Sink Is Enabled
Sink default severity: none
Related Commands:
Use the
command to define a filter for logging
messages to the logging file.
168 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
show logging file content
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show logging file content command to display the contents of the log file.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show logging file content [<severity>] [{all | <application>}]
[<number>] [<module number>]
Syntax
[<severity>] all
Description
The minimum severity of the logging messages that are displayed. The severity is represented by an integer. Possible values are:
• 0 – Emergency
• 1 – Alert
• 2 – Critical
• 3 – Error
• 4 – Warning
• 5 – Notification
• 6 – Informational
• 7 – Debugging
The filter applies to logging messages from all applications.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 169
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Syntax Description
<application> The application to which the filter applies. Possible values are:
• Boot
• System
• ROUTER
• CONFIG
• TEMP
• FILESYS
• FAN
• SUPPLY
• SECURITY
• CASCADE
• QOS
• SWITCHFABRIC
• LAG
• VLAN
• OSPF
• RIP
• SNMP
• POLICY
• CLI
• STP
• ATM
• WAN
• THRESHOLD
[<number>] The number of messages to display. If no number is specified, all messages are displayed.
[<module number>] 1
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1> show logging file content 7 all
1 > 08/04/2003,15:43:36:CLI-Notification: root: set logging file condition all 7
170 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
show logging server condition
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show logging server condition command to display the condition and filtering of logging to the Syslog server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show logging server condition
Example:
W310-1> show logging server condition
*********************************************************
Message logging configuration of SYSLOG sink ***
Sink Is Enabled
Sink default severity: Warning
Server name: 149.49.38.22
Server facility: local7
Server access level: read-write
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages.
• Use the
set logging server access-level
command to define the access level associated with Syslog server sink.
show logging session condition
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show logging session condition command to display the condition and filtering of logging in the current CLI session.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show logging session condition
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 171
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1> show logging session condition
*********************************************************
Message logging configuration of SESSION sink ***
Sink Is Enabled
Sink default severity: Error
Facility ! Severity Override
-------------------------------------------
SUPPLY ! Warning
Session source ip: 135.64.102.224
show rmon alarm
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show rmon alarm command to display the settings for a specific alarm entry
that was set by using the rmon alarm
command or using the W310 Manager.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show rmon alarm [<Alarm Index>]
Syntax
[<Alarm Index>]
Description
Alarm index number defined using the
command or the W310 Manager.
172 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Example:
W310-1> show rmon alarm 1026 alarm alarm 1026 is active, owned by amir
Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 every 60 seconds
Taking delta samples, last value was 1712
Rising threshold is 10000, assigned to event # 1054
Falling threshold is 10, assigned to event # 1054
On startup enable rising or_falling alarms.
Related Commands:
command to create a new RMON alarm entry.
show rmon event
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show rmon event command to show the settings for an event entry that was defined by the
command or using the W310 Manager.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show rmon event [<Event Index>]
Syntax
[<Event Index>]
Description
Event index number defined using the
command or the W310 Manager
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 173
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1> show rmon event 1026 event
Event 1054 is active, owned by amir
Description is event for monitoring amir's co
Event firing causes log and trap to community public,last fired 0:0:0
Related Commands:
Use the
command to create an RMON event entry.
show rmon history
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show rmon history command to display the most recent RMON history log for a specific history index. The history index is defined using the
command or using an RMON management tool (W310 Device Manager).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show rmon history [<History Index>]
Syntax Description
[<History Index>] History index number defined using the
command or RMON management tool
174 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Example:
W310-1> show rmon history 1026 history
Entry 1026 is active, owned by amir
Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 every 30 seconds
Requested # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 20
Granted # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 20
Sample # 1 began measuring at 2:53:9
Received 62545 octets, 642 packets,
391 broadcast and 145 multicast packets,
0 undersize and 0 oversize packets,
0 fragments and 0 jabbers,
0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions,
# of dropped packet events (due to a lack of resources): 0
Network utilization is estimated at 0
Related Commands:
command to create an RMON history entry.
show rmon statistics
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show rmon statistics command to show the Received Packet RMON statistics counters for a specific interface according to the MIB-2 interface table numbering scheme.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show rmon statistics [<module/port>]
Syntax
[<module/port range>]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 175
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
Example:
W310-1> show rmon statistics
Statistics for switch is active,owned by Monitor
Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 which has
Received 26375085 octets, 222536 packets,
154821 broadcast and 53909 multicast packets,
0 undersize and 0 oversize packets,
0 fragments and 0 jabbers,
1 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions,
# of dropped packet events (due to a lack of resources): 0
# of packets received of length (in octets):
64:94530, 65-127:85124, 128-255:25896,
256-511:10440, 512-1023:6057, 1024-1518:489
Related Commands:
Use the
command to clear all RMON statistics from the
switch.
show utilization
Use the show utilization command to display CPU and RAM usage.
! To see CPU utilization, you must first enable the counter using the set utilization cpu
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show utilization
Example:
W310-1> show utilization
Mod CPU CPU RAM RAM
5sec 60sec used(%) Total(Kb)
--- ------ ----- ------- ----------
1 1% 90% 39% 50217 Kb
176 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 9
Field
Mod
CPU 5sec
CPU 60sec
RAM used (%)
RAM Total (Kb)
Description
Module number (always 1)
CPU utilization in the past five seconds
CPU utilization in the past 60 seconds
Percentage of RAM used
Total amount of RAM in W310
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to disable CPU utilization monitoring on the specified module.
• Use the
command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 177
Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands
178 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10
Policy Commands
Overview
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure policies on the W310.
The W310 provides two types of policies: Access Control List (ACL) and Quality of Service
(QoS).
For each IP packet, an ACL rule is matched. If the packet is allowed, a QoS rule is matched.
The ACL and QoS policy lists are searched according to the interface where the packet either
• arrives or
• is transmitted.
Policies are applied by classifying packets according to key fields in the packets.
The W310 policy scheme differentiates between
• packets to the W310 (ingress policy) and
• packets going out of the W310 (egress policy)
Ingress and Egress Policy
Ingress policy is enforced on packets coming from Light Access Point (LAP) ports while egress policy is enforced on packets destined to LAP ports. Packets that arrive from an
Access Point (AP) port or destined to an AP port are classified according to the group that the AP belongs to. The Access Point Group (APG) is an identifier that aggregates ports that have the same policy behavior. The APG and the direction is the context in which the policy operations take place. This will be referred to as PEP or AP Group (policy enforcement point). Every PEP/AP Group shall have several lists attached to it, such as ACL, QoS and several scalars that define its attributes.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 179
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Chapter Contents
This chapter contains the following sections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
W310 Policy Commands
This section describes the following commands:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
180 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
clear-policy-statistics
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group
Use the clear-policy-statistics command to reset the policy statistics.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear-policy-statistics [<interface> <direction> [<listtype>]]
Syntax
<interface>
<direction>
[<list-type>]
Description
Resets the policy list(s) for the specified interface.
!
This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.
Resets the statistics by the direction of the policy (to/from interface) or policy list number.
Specify the list type assigned for this choice
Example::
W310-1 (super)# clear policy-statistics
Clearing statistics for:
Interface: floor4 Direction: In List: Default ACL List
Interface: floor4 Direction: In List: Default QoS List
Interface: floor4 Direction: Out List: Default ACL List
Interface: floor4 Direction: Out List: Default QoS List
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 181
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
composite-operation
User level: privileged, supervisor.
The following table describes when to use the composite-operation command.
Command Mode
QoS List
IP Rule
QoS Rule
Ether Type Rule
Description
Use the composite operation command to create a composite operation or enter Composite Operation command mode for the composite operation specified.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.
Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.
Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.
182 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is shown in the following table.
Command Mode
QoS List
DSCP Table
Ether Type Rule
IP Rule
QoS Rule
Syntax
[no] composite-operation <index>
[no] composite-operation {no-change |
CoS0 | CoS1 | CoS2 | CoS3 | CoS4 | CoS5
| CoS6 | CoS7 | trust-DSCP-only | trust-
DSCP-CoS | <composite-operation-name>} composite-operation {permit | deny | deny-notify} composite-operation (Permit | Deny |
Deny-Notify | Deny-Rst | Deny-Notify-
Rst}
[no] composite-operation {no-change |
CoS0 | CoS1 | CoS2 | CoS3 | CoS4 | CoS5
| CoS6 | CoS7 | trust-DSCP-only | trust-
DSCP-CoS | <composite-operation-name>}
The following table describes the syntax parameters.
Syntax
<index>
Description
Index number assigned to the composite operation.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 183
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
184
Syntax
no-change
CoS0
CoS1
CoS2
CoS3
CoS4
CoS5
CoS6
CoS7 trust-dscp-only trust-dscp-and-cos operation to be applied
Description
Specify the following:
• no-change indicates there is no change to the priority for the composite operation settings.
• Priority Class of Service (CoS). CoS is traffic differentiation or the ability to treat packets differently based on the packet’s importance.
• Priority tags used with the data flow using trust-dscp-only or
trust-dscp-and-cos
Specify the operation that should be applied to a packet.
• Permit (default)
• Deny
• Deny-Notify - Denies the operation and notifies the administrator.
• Deny-Rst - Denies the operation and resets the rule.
• Deny-Notify-Rst - Denies the operation, notifies the administrator, and resets the rule.
2 of 2
Example:
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# composite-operation Deny
Done!
Command Mode: QoS Rule Table
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation deny
Done!
Command Mode: Ether Type Rule
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ether type rule 100)# composite-
operation deny
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Command Mode: ACL/Qos List
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#
cookie
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the cookie command to set the list cookie for an access control list (ACL) or QoS list.
This is used by the quality of service (QoS) manager. Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] cookie <cookie>
Syntax
<cookie>
Description
ID number of the cookie for the ACL. The default value is 0.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# cookie 12345
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 185
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
cos
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: CoS
Use the cos command to set the priority value for the current composite operation. Use the
[no] form of the command to reset the priority to the default value of no-change.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] cos no-change | <priority-value>
Syntax
no-change
<priority value>
Description
no-change - the default value indicates the priority has not changed
Sets the priority value for the Class of Service. The range is 0 to
7.
Example:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# cos 2
Done!
186 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
destination-ip
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the destination-ip command to set the requested destination IP address for packets to which the current IP rule applies.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] destination-ip {host <ip-address> | any | <ip-address>
<wildcard>}
Syntax Description
host • ip-address: IP address of a specific host.
• any: Current rule applies to any address
<ip-address>
<wildcard>
Requested destination IP address.
Range of IP addresses of the rule.
The zero bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that remain fixed. The one bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that can vary. Note that this is the opposite of how bits are used in a netmask.
not Destination IP address of packets to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination IP addresses except for those that you specify with not keyword.
Example:
To specify that rule 21 applies to all packets having destination IP address 135.64.104.102
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-ip host
135.64.104.102
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 187
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
To specify that rule 21 applies to packets whose destination IP address is in the range of
176.13.0.0 through 176.13.255.255:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-ip 176.13.0.0
0.0.255.255
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
destination-user-group
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the destination-user-group command to set the destination policy user group name to match.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] destination-user-group <name>
Syntax
<name> not
Description
Destination policy user group name. Up to 32 characters.
Destination user group of packets to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination user groups except for those that you specify with not keyword.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-user-group
finance
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
188 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
dscp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the dscp command to set the differentiated service code point (DSCP) value for the current policy operation. The DSCP value in the IP packets can be used to classify the traffic based on the DSCP-to-Class of Service (CoS) mappings. Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of no-change.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] dscp <value> | no-change
Syntax
<value> no-change
Description
DSCP value that should be applied to packets. Values range from
0 to 63.
no-change means the DSCP value is left unchanged. This is the default.
Example:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# dscp 23
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 189
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
dscp-table
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: CoS
Use the dscp-table command to enter or create the differentiated service code point
(DSCP) Table command mode for the specified DSCP value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: dscp-table <dscp-value>
Syntax
<dscp-value>
Description
DSCP value. The range is 0 to 63.
Example:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# dscp-table 23
W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 23)#
ether-type
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table
Use the ether-type command to specify the packet’s ether type.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ether-type <type>
Syntax
<type>
Description
Packet’s ether type. The range is 0 to 65535. IP protocol (2048) is not allowed.
190 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)# ether-type 50
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)#
ether-type-rule
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the ether-type-rule command to create or enter an ether type rule.
Use the [no] form of this command to delete the rule.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ether-type-rule {<index> | default}
Syntax
<index> default
Description
Number of the rule. The range is from 1 to 9999.
Use the default rule.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ether-type-rule 21
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ether type rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 191
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
ether-type simulate
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: PEP/AP Group
Use the ether-type simulate command to specify the ether type packet simulation.
For ether type IP access control list (ACL).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ether-type simulate <list-number> <direction> <ether-type>
<traffic-type>
192
Syntax
<list-number>
<direction>
<ether-type>
<traffic-type>
Description
Access Control List (ACL) for the specified interface. Range is
300 to 399, 300 is the default ACL list.
Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to/from interface), or policy list number. Use one of the following:
• in
• out
Packet’s ether type. The range is 0 to 65535.
• unicast - used for a single sender and receiver on a network
• broadcast - used for a single sender and all receivers n a network
• multicast - used for a single sender and a select number of receivers on a network
Example:
W310-1(super/AP Group engineering)# ether-type simulate 300
in 500 unicast
Rule match for simulated packet is the default rule
Composite action for simulated packet is Permit
Access is Forward
W310-1(super/AP Group engineering)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
icmp
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the icmp command to specify that the current rule applies to a specific type of Internet
Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet.
Use the not
form of this command to specify that the rule applies to all packets except those of the specified ICMP type.
Note: The icmp command also sets the IP protocol to ICMP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] icmp {<name> | <type> <code>}
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 193
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Syntax
name type code
Description
ICMP message name, type and code. Enter either the name (with a dash between each word) or the type and code. See the list below.
Name
Echo-Reply
Unreachable
Network unreachable
Host unreachable
Protocol unreachable
Port unreachable
Fragmentation needed but DF bit set
Source route failed
Destination network unknown
Destination host unknown
Destination network administratively prohibited
Network unreachable for
TOS
Host unreachable for
TOS
Communication administratively prohibited by filtering
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Type
0
2
3
Code
0
Don’t care
0
1
4
5
6
7
9
Name
Host precedence violation
Precedence cutoff in effect
Source quench
Type
3
3
4
Redirect
Redirect for network
Redirect for host
Redirect for type-of-service and network
Redirect for type-of-service and host
5
5
5
5
5
8 Echo request
Router advertisement
Router solicitation
10
Code
14
15
0
Don’t care
0
1
2
3
0
0
11
12
13
Time exceeded 11
Time-to-live equals 0 during transit
Time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly
11
11
Don’t care
0
1
194 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax
name type code
(continued)
Description
Name
Parameters problem
Bad IP header
Required option missing
Timestamp requested
Timestamp reply
12
13
14
Address mask request
17
Traceroute
Traceroute outbound packet successfully forwarded
Traceroute no route for outbound packet
30
30
30
Type
12
12
Code
Don’t care
0
1
0
0
0
Don’t care
0
1
Name
Conversion errors
Mobile Host
Redirect 32 ipv6-where-areyou 33 ipv6-I-am-here
34
Mobile registration request
Mobile registration reply
Domain name request
Domain name replay
35
36
37
38
Skip algorithm discovery protocol
Security failure
39
40
Type
31
Don’t care
Don’t care
Don’t care
Don’t care
0
Code
Don’t care
Don’t care
0
0
Don’t care
Example:
Using the type and code:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# icmp 0 0
Rule protocol changed!
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 195
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Using the name:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# icmp Echo-Reply
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
ip access-control-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ip access-control-list command to create an access control list (also called IP policy) or to enter ACL List command mode. This enters the configuration mode for the specified access control list. Use the [no] form of this command to delete an IP access list.
Note: You cannot delete an active list with the [no] form of this command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ip access-control-list <index>
Syntax
<index>
Description
Access control list (ACL). This will enter you into the list’s command mode. Range is 301 to 399. The default is 301.
Example:
W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 330
W310-1(super/ACL 330)#
196 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
ip access-group
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: AP Group Interface
Command Mode:
Use the ip access-group command to activate a specific ACL list for an AP Group in the direction specified.
Syntax:
ip access-group <policy-list-number> {in | out}
Syntax Description
<policy-list-number> ACL to activate. Range is 301 to 399. The default is 301.
Example:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in
ip-fragments-in
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the ip-fragments-in command to set the treatment that is applied to incoming IP fragmentation packets for the current access control list.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ip-fragments-in {Permit | Deny}
Syntax
{Permit | Deny}
Description
• Permit IP fragmentation packets
• Deny IP fragmentation packets
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 197
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip fragments-in Deny
ip-option-in
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the ip-option-in command to specify the treatment of packets carrying an IP option that enter the current interface.
Use the no form of the command to restore the default treatment of IP option packets.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ip-option-in {Permit | Deny | Deny-Notify | Deny-Rst |
Deny-Notify-Rst}
Syntax
Action
Description
• Permit packets carrying IP options
• Deny packets carrying IP options
• Deny-Notify denies packets carrying IP options and notifies the administrator
• Deny-Rst denies packets carrying IP options and resets the connection.
• Deny-Notify-Rst denies packets carrying IP options, notifies the administrator, and resets the connection.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip option-in Deny-Notify
198 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
ip policy-list-copy
User level: supervisor
Use the ip policy-list-copy to copy an existing policy list to a new destination.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip policy-list-copy <source-list> <destination-list>
Syntax
<source-list>
<destination-list>
Description
Source list number to copy.
• For access control lists: 300 - 399
• For QoS lists: 400 - 499
List number to which you want to copy the original policy list.
• For access control lists: 301 - 399
• For QoS lists: 401 - 499
Example:
To copy a policy list:
W310-1(super)# ip policy-list-copy 400 401
Done!
W310-1(super)#
ip-protocol
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the ip-protocol command to set the IP protocol for the current rule. This specifies that the current rule applies to all packets having the specified IP protocol.
Use the not form of this command to specify that the current rule applies to all packets except those having the specified IP protocol.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 199
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] ip-protocol {<name> | <number>}
Syntax
{<name> |
<number>
Description
Use the protocol name or the protocol number. See list below.
Protocol
Ah
Esp
Icmp
Igmp
Ipcomp
Ipinip
Ospf
Pim
Rsvp
Tcp
Udp
Vrrp
Spectralink
No.
Description
51 Authentication header protocol
50
1
Encapsulation security protocol
Internet Control Message Protocol
4
89
2 Internet Gateway Message Protocol
108 IP payload compression protocol
IP in IP tunneling
OSPF routing protocol
103 Protocol Independent Multicast
46 Resource reservation protocol
6
17
Transmission Control Protocol
User Datagram Protocol
112 Virtual routing redundancy protocol
119 SpectraLink wireless phones
[not] Excludes the specified protocol from the rule.*/
200 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Example:
Using the protocol name:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# ip-protocol igmp
Done!
Using the number assigned to the protocol:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# ip-protocol 2
Done!
ip qos-group
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: AP Group Interface
Command Mode:
Use the ip qos-group command to activate a specific QoS list for an AP Group in the direction specified.
Syntax:
ip qos-group <policy-list-number> {in | out}
Syntax Description
<policy-list-number> QoS list to activate. This is a range of 401 to 499. The default is
401.
Example:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 402 out
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 201
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
ip qos-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: QoS Rule Table
Use the ip qos-list command to create a QoS list or enter QoS List command mode for an existing QoS list.
Use the [no] form of this command to delete the list.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ip qos-list <list>
Syntax
<list>
Description
Identification for the QoS list. This is a range of 401 to 499. The default is 401.
Example:
W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 401
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
202 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
ip-rule
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the ip-rule command to create a rule or enter IP Rule mode for a specific IP rule.
Use the [no] form of this command to delete the rule.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ip-rule {<index> | default}
Syntax
<index> default
Description
Number of the rule from within the policy list. Specify a number from 1 to 9999.
Use this keyword to enter IP Rule command mode for the default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any other rules in the policy.
Example:
To enter the IP Rule command mode for IP rule 21:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip-rule 21
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 203
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
ip simulate
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: PEP/AP Group
Use the ip-simulate command to test the action of a policy on a simulated packet. For IP
ACL and QoS policies.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ip-simulate <list-number> <direction> [<priority>] [<dscpvalue>] <source> <destination> [<protocol>] | [udp {<source port> | <name>} {<destination-port> | <name>}] | [tcp
{<source-port> | <name>} {<destination- port> | <name>}
[established]] | [icmp {<name> | <type> <code>} ]
204
Syntax
<list>
<direction>
<priority>
<dscp-value>
<source>
<destination>
<protocol>
Description
Policy list(s) for the specified interface.
• 300 to 499; 300 is default ACL or 400 is default QoS
Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to or from interface), or policy list number. Enter one of the following:
• in
• out
The priority of the policy. Enter CoS0, CoS1, CoS2, CoS3,
CoS4, CoS5, CoS6, or CoS7
Differentiated service code point value. The range for this value is dscp0 to dscp63.
The source IP address
The destination IP address
The protocol to use
• udp for user datagram protocol
• tcp for transmission control protocol
• icmp for Internet control message protocol
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax Description
<source port> |
<name>
<destination port> |
<name>
[established] icmp name icmp type icmp code
The ip address of the source port of the simulated packet or the name of the rule that applies to the protocol.
The ip address of the destination port of the simulated packet or the name of the rule that applies to the protocol
The value of the TCP established bit
Specify the rule that applies to the icmp
Specify the icmp type to which the rule applies
Specify the icmp code to which the rule applies.
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)# ip simulate 450 out
CoS4 149.30.120.4 149.29.140.90 icmp 3 0
Rule match for simulated packet is Permit
Composite action for simulated packet is Permit
Access us Forward
ACL action for ip-fragments : Permit
ACL action for ip-options: Permit
W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 205
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
name
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List, QoS Table Rule
Use the name command to set the name for the policy access control list or QoS list.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default name, depending on the command mode.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] name <name>
Syntax
<name>
Description
Name for the policy access control list (ACL) or QoS list. The default names are as follows.
• ACL: ACL List #list-number
• QoS: QoS List #list-number
• Composite Operation #index
Example:
Command Mode: ACL and QoS List
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# name engcomposite
Done!
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#
Command Mode: QoS Table Rule
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# name admin23
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330)#
206 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
owner
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: ACL List, QoS List
Use the owner command to set the list owner for the policy access control list or QoS list.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default owner.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] owner <owner-name>
Syntax
<owner-name>
Description
Owner for the policy access control list or QoS list. The default value is other. Use up to 80 characters to set an owner.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# owner admin
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 207
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
pre-classification
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: QoS Rule Table
Use the pre-classification command to specify which priority tag the current QoS list uses for data flows. The default setting is trust-cos-dscp.
Use the no form of the command to reset the QoS list to use the default priority tag, trustcos-dscp.
Syntax:
[no] pre-classification {untrusted | trust-cos | trust-dscp | trust-cos-dscp}
Syntax
{untrusted | trustcos | trust-dscp | trust-cos-dscp}
Description
Specify the type of priority tag:
• trusted
• trust-cos (class of service)
• trust-dscp (differentiated service code point)
• trust-cos-dscp (default)
Example:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# pre-classification trust-dscp
Done!
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
208 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
show dscp-table
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List, IP Rule Table, Composite Operation, DSCP Table
Use show dscp-table to display a specific entry or all entries for the differentiated service code point (DSCP) table. Null argument shows all.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show dscp-table [<index> | all]]
Syntax
<index> all
Description
The DSCP entry.
This keyword is used in DSCP Table command mode only.
Example:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# show dscp-table
Trust configuration is trust-cos
DSCP Action Name
---- ------ -------
0 CoS0 DSCP#0
1 CoS0 DSCP#1
2 CoS0 DSCP#2
3 CoS0 DSCP#3
4 CoS0 DSCP#4
5 CoS0 DSCP#5
6 CoS0 DSCP#6
7 CoS0 DSCP#7
8 CoS1 DSCP#8
9 CoS1 DSCP#9
.
.
.
63 CoS7 DSCP#63
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 209
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
show ether-type-rule
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List, Ether Type Rule Table
Use the show ether-type-rule command to display the entries for an ether-type rule number. Null argument shows all.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Command Mode: List
show ether-type-rule [<index>]
Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table
show ether-type-rule [<index> | all]
Syntax
<index> all
Description
Ether-type rule number. If omitted, all ether type rules display.
Displays all the ether type rules. This is the default.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# show ether-type-rule
Index Ether-Type Traffic-Type Operation
----- ---------- ------------ ---------
21 21 Multicast Permit
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
210 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
show ip access-control-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, AP-Group
Use the show ip access-control-list command to display the attributes of a specific access control list on the current interface.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Command Mode: Root
show ip access-control-list {<list> | all | <interface>}
[detailed]
Command Mode: Interface
show ip access-control-list {<list> | all | {active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}} [detailed]
Syntax
<list> all
<interface>
{active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}
[detailed]
Description
Policy list(s) for the specified interface.
! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.
Displays all access control lists
The interface
• active-list-in displays lists for the ingress direction
• active-list-out displays lists for the egress direction
• active-list-in-out displays lists for both the ingress and egress directions
Display detailed information
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 211
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# show ip access-control-list all detailed
List Number: 300
---------------
List Name: Default ACL List
Default Action: permit
Owner: other
List Number: 320
---------------
List Name: Sync1
Default Action: permit
Owner: x9393
List Number: 330
---------------
List Name: Admin13
Default Action: permit
Owner: Charlie
show ip active-policy-lists
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group
Use the show ip active-policy-lists to display the active policy lists.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Command Mode: Root
show ip active-policy-lists <interface> [sort-by-interface | direction | type | list-number]
212 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Command Mode: PEP/AP Group
show ip active-policy-lists [all] [direction | type | listnumber]
Syntax Description
<interface>
[sort-by-interface | direction | type | listnumber] all
Policy list(s) for the specified interface.
Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to/from interface), or policy list number.
Displays all the active policy lists on the device.
Example:
To display the active policy lists in Root command mode:
W310-1(super)# show ip active-policy-lists
Interface Name Dir. Type Idx List Name
-------------------------------- ---- ---- --- ------------------
In ACL 300 Default ACL List
In QoS 400 Default QoS List
Out ACL 300 Default ACL List
Out QoS 400 Default QoS List
To display active policy lists in PEP/AP Group command mode:
W310-1(super)# show ip active-policy-lists
Interface Name Dir. Type Idx List Name
-------------------------------- ---- ---- --- -----------------engineering Out ACL 300 Default ACL List engineering Out QoS 400 Default QoS List engineering In ACL 300 Default ACL List engineering In QoS 400 Default QoS List
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 213
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
show ip qos-list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, Interface
Use show ip qos-list to display the attributes for a specific Quality of Service (QoS) list or all QoS lists for the current interface.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Command Mode: Root
show ip qos-list {<list> | all | <interface>} [detailed]
Command Mode: Interface
show ip qos-list {<list> | all | {active-list-in | activelist-out | active-list-in-out}} [detailed]
Syntax
<list> all
<interface>
{active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}
[detailed]
Description
QoS list(s) for the specified interface to display.
! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.
Displays all QoS lists.
Interface is not required for the Interface command mode.
Otherwise, specify the interface type.
Specify as follows:
• active-list-in displays lists for the ingress direction
• active-list-out displays lists for the egress direction
• active-list-in-out displays lists for both the ingress and egress directions
Displays detailed information
214
Example:
W310-1(super)# show ip qos-list
Index Name Owner
----- ----------- ------------
400 Default QoS List other
401 list #401 other
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
show ip-rule
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List, IP Rule Table
Use the show ip-rule command to display the attributes for the specific rule. Leave the
[index] parameter blank to display all rules.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
Command Mode: List
show ip-rule [index]
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
show ip-rule [index | all]
Syntax
index all
Description
IP rule number. Leave blank to display all rules.
Displays the attributes for all IP rules.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# show ip-rule
Index Protocol IP / User-Group Wildcard Port Operation
----- -------- --- ---------------- --------------- ------------ --------
Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit
Dst Any Any
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 215
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
show list
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: List
Use the show list command to display information about the access control list.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show list [detailed]
Syntax
[detailed]
Description
Displays the information details for the access control list.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330)# show list
Index Name Owner
-------------------------------------------------------
330 list #330 other ip options: Permit ip fragments: Permit
Index Protocol IP/User-Group Wildcard Port Operation
----- -------- ------------- -------- ---- ---------
Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit
Dst Any Any
Index Name Access Notify Reset-Connection
---------- ------ --------------- ----------------
0 Permit forward no-trap no-reset
1 Deny deny no-trap no-reset
3 Deny-Notify deny trap no-reset
Ether Type Rule Table:
Index Ether-Type Traffic-Type Operation
216 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
show-policy-statistics
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group
Use the show-policy-statistics command to display the hits per policy list rule.
• The IP and ether type for the Access Control List (ACL).
• IP for the Quality of Service (QoS).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show-policy-statistics [<interface> <direction> [<listtype>]]
Syntax
<interface>
<direction>
<list-type>
Description
Policy list(s) for the specified interface.
! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.
Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to or from interface), or policy list number.
Policy list type - ACL or QoS.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 217
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Example::
W310-1# show-policy-statistics
Interface: floor2 Direction: In List: Default ACL List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
Interface: floor2 Direction: In List: Default QoS List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
Interface: floor2 Direction: Out List: Default ACL List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
218
Interface: floor2 Direction: Out List: Default QoS List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
Interface: floor1 Direction: In List: Default ACL List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
Interface: floor1 Direction: In List: Default QoS List
Index Session Counter Packet Counter
--------- --------------- --------------
10000 0 0
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
source-ip
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the source-ip command to set the IP address of the source station. This indicates that the current rule applies to packets from the specified source IP address.
Use the not form of the command to indicate that the current rule applies to all packets
except those coming from the specified IP address
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] source-ip {host <ip-address> | any | <ip-address>
<wildcard>}
Syntax Description
host • ip-address: Specify the IP address of a specific host.
• any: Specifies any source IP address.
<ip-address>
<wildcard> not
Requested source IP address of packets to which this rule is applied.
Range of IP address
Source IP address of packets to which this rule is not applied.
The rule is applied to all source IP addresses except for those that you specify with not keyword.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# source-ip host
135.64.104.102
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 219
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
source-user-group
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the source-user-group command to set the source policy user group name.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] source-user-group <name>
Syntax
<name> not
Description
Source policy user group name. Up to 32 characters.
Source user group of packets to which this rule is not applied.
The rule is applied to all source user groups except those that you specify with not keyword.
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# source-user-group finance
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
220 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
tcp destination-port
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the tcp destination-port command to set the requested Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) destination ports to match. The protocol must be set to TCP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] tcp destination-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name>
| <port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }
Syntax
any
{eq | lt | gt}
Description
Applies the rule to a port with any name or number.
Specifies one of the following:
• eq (equal) applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number
• lt (lower than) applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number
• gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number
1 of 3
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 221
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
222
Syntax
<port-name>
<port-number> range
Description
Application name or number from the list below.
Rlogin
Rsh
Rtsp
Smtp
Ssh
Ssl
Syslog
Talk
Telnet
Time
Whois
Http
Gopher
Ident
Irc
Klogin
Kshell
Ldap
Nntp
Pop3
Protocol
Bgp
Discard
Dns
Echo
Finger
Ftp
Fp-data
22
443
514
517
513
512
554
25
23
37
43
80
544
389
119
110
70
113
194
543
7
79
21
20
No.
179
9
53
Description
Border Gateway Protocol
Discard
Domain Name Service
Echo
Finger
File Transfer Protocol
FTP data connections
Gopher
Ident
Internet Relay Chat
Kerberos login
Kerberos shell
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
Network News Transport Protocol
Post Office Protocol Version 3 rlogin
Rsh
Real Time Streaming Protocol
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
Secure Shell
Secure Sockets Layer syslog
Talk telnet
Time
Who is
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
Port number for the port you want to apply the rule. Default is 0.
See table in previous row for number.
Range of ports
2 of 3
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax
<start port> <end port> not
Description
Range for the port settings. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.
• Default for start port is 0.
• Default for end port is 65535.
Destination TCP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination TCP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.
3 of 3
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp destination-port eq
ftp
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
tcp-established
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the tcp-established command to specify that the current rule applies only to packets that are part of an established TCP session. Use the no form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to any TCP packets.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] tcp-established
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp-established
Rule protocol changed.
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 223
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
tcp source-port
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the tcp source-port command to set the requested Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) destination ports to match. The protocol must be set to TCP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] tcp source-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name> |
<port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }
Syntax
any
{eq | lt | gt}
Description
Applies the rule to a port with any name or number.
Specifies one of the following:
• eq (equal) applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number
• lt (lower than) applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number
• gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number
1 of 3
224 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax
<port-name>
Description
Application name or number from the list below.
Rlogin
Rsh
Rtsp
Smtp
Ssh
Ssl
Syslog
Talk
Telnet
Time
Whois
Http
Gopher
Ident
Irc
Klogin
Kshell
Ldap
Nntp
Pop3
Protocol
Bgp
Discard
Dns
Echo
Finger
Ftp
Fp-data
22
443
514
517
513
512
554
25
23
37
43
80
544
389
119
110
70
113
194
543
7
79
21
20
No.
179
9
53
Description
Border Gateway Protocol
Discard
Domain Name Service
Echo
Finger
File Transfer Protocol
FTP data connections
Gopher
Ident
Internet Relay Chat
Kerberos login
Kerberos shell
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
Network News Transport Protocol
Post Office Protocol Version 3 rlogin
Rsh
Real Time Streaming Protocol
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
Secure Shell
Secure Sockets Layer syslog
Talk telnet
Time
Who is
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
<port-number> range
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Port number for the port you want to apply the rule. Default is 0.
See table in previous row for number.
Range of ports
2 of 3
225
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Syntax
<start port> <end port> not
Description
Range for the port settings. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.
• Default for start port is 0.
• Default for end port is 65535.
Source TCP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all source TCP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.
3 of 3
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp source-port eq ftp
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
traffic-type
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table
Use the traffic-type command to specify how to match packet types based on traffic types that include all, broadcast, multicast, or broadcast and multicast. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value of all.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] traffic-type {all | broadcast | multicast | broadcastmulticast}
Example:
W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)# traffic=type
multicast
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)#
226 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
udp destination-port
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the udp destination-port command to set the requested User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) ports to match.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] udp destination-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name>
| <port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }
Syntax
any
{eq | lt | gt}
Description
Applies the rule to a port with any name or number
Specifies one of the following:
• eq applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number
• lt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number
• gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number
1 of 3
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 227
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Syntax
<port-name>
Description
Application name from the list below.
Protocol
Bootpc
Bootps
Discard
Dns
Echo
Ike
NetBios-ns
NetBios-ds
NetBios-ss
Ntp
Rip
Rtsp
Snmp
Snmp-trap
Syslog
Talk
Tftp
Time
Who
554
161
162
514
138
139
123
520
53
7
500
137
No.
68
67
9
517
69
37
Description
Bootstrap protocol for the client
Bootstrap protocol for the server
Discard
Domain Name Service
Echo
Internet Key Exchange
Name Service
Datagram Service
Session Service
Network Time Protocol
Routing Information Protocol
Real Time Streaming Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol, Traps
System Logger
Talk
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Time
<port-number> range
Port number that you want to apply the rule. Default is 0. Range for this value is 0 to 65535. See numbers in row above.
Range of ports to which you want to apply the rule.
2 of 3
228 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Syntax
<start port> <end port> not
Description
Start port and end port range for which you want to apply the rule. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.
• Default for start port is 0.
• Default for end port is 65535.
Destination UDP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination UDP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.
3 of 3
Example:
For UDP destination ports:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# udp destination-port eq
ftp
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 229
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
udp source-port
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: IP Rule Table
Use the udp source-port command to set the requested User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports to match.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[not] udp source-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name> |
<port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }
Syntax
any
{eq | lt | gt}
Description
Applies the rule to a port with any name or number
Specifies one of the following:
• eq applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number
• lt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number
• gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number
1 of 3
230 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Syntax
<port-name>
Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands
Description
Application name from the list below.
Protocol
Bootpc
Bootps
Discard
Dns
Echo
Ike
NetBios-ns
NetBios-ds
NetBios-ss
Ntp
Rip
Rtsp
Snmp
Snmp-trap
Syslog
Talk
Tftp
Time
Who
554
161
162
514
138
139
123
520
53
7
500
137
No.
68
67
9
517
69
37
Description
Bootstrap protocol for the client
Bootstrap protocol for the server
Discard
Domain Name Service
Echo
Internet Key Exchange
Name Service
Datagram Service
Session Service
Network Time Protocol
Routing Information Protocol
Real Time Streaming Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol, Traps
System Logger
Talk
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Time
<port-number> range
Port number that you want to apply the rule. Default is 0. Range for this value is 0 to 65535. See numbers in row above.
Range of ports to which you want to apply the rule.
2 of 3
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 231
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Syntax
<start port> <end port> not
Description
Start port and end port range for which you want to apply the rule. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.
• Default for start port is 0.
• Default for end port is 65535.
Source UDP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all source UDP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.
3 of 3
Example:
For UDP source ports:
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# udp source-port eq ftp
Done!
W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#
Setting Policy: Example 1
This example shows how to configure a policy to provide exclusive access of a “marketing” server to the marketing user group and an “engineering” server to the engineering user group.
Network Setup:
The following equipment is used.
• W310 with an IP address 192.168.0.5
• Two servers named - Marketing server (192.168.0.15) and Engineering server
(192.168.0.20)
• RADIUS server (optional)
232 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 1
How To Configure
Step 1. Create and configure the marketing user group on the RADIUS server or W310.
To create the user group on the W310, use the
Step 2. Create and configure the engineering user group on the RADIUS server or
W310.
To create the user group on the W310, use the
Step 3. Create an IP policy:
1 Create an IP policy that has an index number of 301:
W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
2 Name the IP policy server-filter:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# name server-filter
3 Set the owner of the policy:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# owner jackt
Step 4. Add rule 101 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the marketing server
by non-marketing users:
1 Add a rule 101 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101
2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the
marketing user group (identified by policy user group policy-mrkt):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)#not source-user-group
policy-mrkt
3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the marketing server (IP address of 192.168.0.15):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# destination-ip host
192.168.0.15
4 Configure rule 101 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the marketing group and that also have a destination address of the marketing server).
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation
Deny
5 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 233
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Step 5. Add rule 102 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the engineering
server by non-engineering users:
1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 102
2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the
engineering user group (identified by policy user group policy-engr):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)#not source-user-group
policy-engr
3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the engineering server (IP address of 192.168.0.20):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip host
192.168.0.20
4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the engineering group and that also have a destination address of the engineering server):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation
Deny
5 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Step 6. Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any rules in policy 301.
1 Configure a default rule to permit traffic:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-
operation Permit
Note: Use the show list command to show all three rules for IP policy 301.
234
2 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ ip rule default)# exit
W310-1(super/ ACL 301)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Step 7. Enable IP policy 301 on port number 5:
1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for AP group group-1:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 2
2 Activate IP policy 301 for traffic coming into the group-1 interfaces from the wireless clients:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in
3 Add port 5 to the group-1 AP Group:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 5
This step applies policy 301 to port 5 since you applied policy 301 to the AP Group to which port 5 now belongs.
Note: At this point, all necessary policy configurations are complete. The preceding policy is applied to users logging in from the W110 connected to port 5 on the W310. Users can try pinging the servers to test the accessibility.
Setting Policy: Example 2
This example is similar to
except that more Engineering and
Marketing servers are present in the network.
Network Setup:
The “Engineering” servers are on the 192.168.8.x network and “Marketing” servers on the
192.168.9.x network.
How To Configure:
Step 1. Create and configure user group marketing on the RADIUS server or W310.
To create the user group on the W310, use the
Step 2. Create and configure user group engineering on the RADIUS server or W310.
To create the user group on the W310, use the
Step 3. Create an IP policy:
1 Create an IP policy that has an index number of 301:
W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
2 Name the IP policy server-filter:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# name server-filter
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 235
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
3 Set the owner of the policy:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# owner jackt
Step 4: Add rule 101 to the IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the marketing
network by non-marketing users:
1 Add rule 101 to IP policy 301.
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101
2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the marketing user group (identified by policy user group policy-mrkt):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# not source-user-group
policy-mrkt
3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the marketing network (IP address of 192.168.9.x):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)#
destination-ip
192.168.9.0 0.0.0.255
4 Configure rule 101 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that do not come from members of the marketing group and that also have a destination address of the marketing network).
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation
Deny
5 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 101:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit
W310-1 (super/ACL 301)#
Step 5: Add rule 102 to the IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the engineering
network by non-engineering users:
1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip rule 102
2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the
engineering user group (identified by policy user group policy-engr):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# not source-user-group
policy-engr
3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the engineering network (IP address 192.168.8.X):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip
192.168.8.0 0.0.0.255
4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the engineering group and that also have a destination address of
236 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 2 the engineering network).
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation
Deny
5 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 102:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit
W310-1 (super/ACL 301)#
Step 6. Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any rules in policy 301.
1 Configure a default rule to permit traffic:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-
operation Permit
Note: Use the show list command to show all three rules for IP policy 301.
2 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ ip rule default)# exit
W310-1(super/ ACL 301)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Step 7. Enable IP policy 301 on port number 5:
1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for AP group group-1:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1
2 Activate IP policy 301 for traffic coming into the group-1 interfaces from the wireless clients:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in
3 Add port 5 to the group-1 AP Group:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 5
This step applies policy 301 to port 5 since you applied policy 301 to the AP Group to which port 5 now belongs.
Note: At this point, all necessary policy configurations are complete. The preceding policy is applied to users logging in from the W110 connected to port 5 on the W310. Users can try pinging the servers to test the accessibility.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 237
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
Setting Policy: Example 3
This example builds on
demonstrate filtering packets based on geographic location. This example provides access to guest users on networks 192.168.x.x and 66.10.11.x only from the lobby area.
Network Setup:
Same as in
. The W110 in lobby is connected to the W310 ports 5 and 6.
How To Configure:
Step 1: Create a user group for guests:
1 Create a user group named guest:
W310-1(super)# user-group guest
2 Create an AP group named lobby:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group lobby
3 Assign policy user group policy-guest to user group guest:
W310-1(super/User group guest)# policy-user-group
policy-guest
4 Allow user group guest to access the W110 in the AP group lobby:
W310-1(super/User group guest)# allowed-ap-list add
lobby
5 Exit User Group mode:
W310-1(super/User group guest)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Step 2: Create an IP policy.
1 Create an IP policy (access control list) that has an index number of 301
W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
238
Step 3. Add rule 101 to the IP policy 301. This rule will allow guests to access the
192.168.x.x subnet:
1 Add rule 101 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 3
2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# source-user-group
policy-guest
3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the 192.168.x.x network.
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# destination-ip
192.168.0.0 0.0.255.255
4 Configure rule 101 to permit packets that match both criteria (packets from members of the guest user group and that also have a destination address of the
192.168.x.x network):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation
permit
5 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Step 4. Add rule 102 to IP policy 301. This rule will allow guests to access the 66.10.11.x subnet:
1 Add rule 102 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 102
2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# source-user-group
policy-guest
3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the 66.10.11.x network:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip
66.10.11.0 0.0.0.255
4 Configure rule 102 to permit packets that match both criteria (packets from members of the guest user group and that also have a destination of the 66.10.11.x network):
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation
permit
5 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Step 5. Add rule 103 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny guests access to all other networks:
1 Add rule 103 to IP policy 301:
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 103
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 239
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
2 Configure rule 103 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)# source-user-group
policy-guest
3 Configure rule 103 to deny guests access to all other subnets
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)# destination-ip any
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)#
composite-operation
Deny
4 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)#
exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)#
Step 4: Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match
any rules in policy 301.
1 Configure the default rule to permit traffic.
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-
operation Permit
2 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 301)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Step 5. Create and enable AP groups group-1 and lobby on the W310:
1 Create an AP group named group-1:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1
2 Add ports 1 through 4 to group-1:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 1-4
3 Enable IP policy 301 for group-1:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)#
ip access-group 301 in
4 Exit AP Group Interface mode for group-1:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)#exit
W310-1(super)#
5 Add ports 4 through 5 to lobby AP group:
W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# add-ports 4-5
6 Enable IP policy 301 for lobby:
W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# ip access-group 301 in
240 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4
7 Exit AP Group Interface mode for lobby:
W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Setting Policy: Example 4
This example demonstrates use of the Quality of Service (QoS) policy commands. QoS policies are configured to achieve the following:
• Give priority to a particular user group (for example, Management user group). You can give specific traffic a higher priority by setting or increasing the 802.1p priority and changing the DSCP value.
• Prioritize the traffic stream accessing a particular server, for example, set the 802.1p.
• Change the packet priority and DSCP value based on the current DSCP value.
Configuring a QoS Policy for Incoming Traffic:
Step 1: Create QoS policy 401 to apply to incoming traffic on an interface:
1 Create a QoS policy that has an index number of 401:
W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 401
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Step 2. Create composite operation 12 to set the CoS and DSCP values of packets:
1 Create a composite-operation that has an index number of 12:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12
2 Configure composite operation 12 to assign packets a CoS value of 7 and a DSCP value of 45.
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# cos 7
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# dscp 45
3 Exit Composite Operation mode:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#
exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401) #
Step 3. Add rule 105 to QoS policy 401. This rule will apply composite operation 14 to traffic from the user group mgmt:
1 Add a rule 105 to QoS policy 401:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 105
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 241
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
2 Configure rule 105 to filter packets that are coming from the members of the mgmt user group:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# source-user-group
mgmt
3 Apply composite operation 12 to the rule
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# composite-operation
Op12
4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 105:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Step 4. Add rule 107 to QoS policy 401. This rule will assign a CoS priority of 7 to traffic going to the server at 192.168.0.15:
1 Add a rule 107 to QoS policy 401:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 107
2 Configure rule 107 to filter packets that are destined to 192.168.0.15:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# destination-ip host
192.168.0.15
3 Configure rule 107 to apply a CoS priority to traffic destined to the server at
192.168.0.15. This operation sets the 802.1p priority to 7.
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# composite-operation
CoS7
4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 107:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Step 5: Create composite operation 13 to change the CoS priority and DSCP value of packets:
1 Create a composite-operation to change the CoS and DSCP values.
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 13
2 Configure composite operation 13 to set the 802.1p priority to 6.
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# cos 6
3 Configure composite operation 13 to set the DSCP value to 60.
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# dscp 60
Note: The show composite-operation 13 command shows the configured operation.
242 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4
4 Exit Composite Operation mode for operation 13:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Step 6: Add rule 108 to IP policy 401. This rule will trust the incoming DSCP value of all traffic that does not match rule 105 or 107.
1 Add a rule 108 to QoS policy 401:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 108
2 Configure rule 108 to trust the incoming DSCP value of packets:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 108)# composite-operation
trust-dscp
3 Exit IP rule mode for rule 108:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 108)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Step 7: Apply composite operation 13 to packets based on their current DSCP value:
1 Apply composite operation 13 to packets that have a DSCP of 25:
W310-1(super/QoS 401)# dscp-table 25
W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 25)# composite-operation Op13
2 Exit DSCP Table mode:
W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 25)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 401)#
Configuring a QoS Policy for Outgoing Traffic
Step 1: Create QoS policy 402 to apply to outgoing traffic on the interface:
1 Create a QoS policy that has an index number of 402:
W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 402
W310-1(super/QoS 402)#
Step 2: Create composite operation 12 that sets the CoS and DSCP values of packets.
1 Create a composite operation that has an index number of 12:
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# composite-operation 12
2 Configure composite operation 12 to assign packets a CoS value of 7 and a DSCP value of 45:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 14)# cos 7
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 243
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 14)# dscp 45
3 Exit Composite Operation mode:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 12)#
exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402) #
244
Step 3: Add rule 105 to QoS policy 402. This rule will apply composite operation 12 to traffic going to members of the mgmt user group:
1 Add rule 105 to QoS policy 402:
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 105
2 Configure rule 105 to filter packets that are destined to members of the mgmt user group:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# destination-user-
group mgmt
3 Apply composite operation 12 to packets that match rule 105.
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# composite-operation
Op12
4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 105:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)#
Step 4: Add rule 106 to QoS policy 402. This rule will assign a CoS priority of 7 to traffic coming from the server at 192.168.0.15:
1 Add a rule 106 to QoS policy 402:
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 106
2 Configure rule 106 to filter packets that have a source of 192.168.0.15:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# source-ip host
192.168.0.15
3 Configure rule 106 to apply a CoS priority to packets from the server at
192.168.0.15. This operation sets the 802.1p priority to 7.
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# composite-operation
CoS7
4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 106:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402)#
Step 5: Create composite operation 13 to change the CoS priority and DSCP value of packets:
1 Create a composite-operation 13.
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# composite-operation 13
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4
2 Configure composite operation 13 to set the 802.1p priority to 6.
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# cos 6
3 Configure composite operation 13 to set the DSCP value to 60.
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# dscp 60
Note: The show composite-operation 13 command shows the configured operation.
4 Exit Composite Operation mode for operation 13:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402)#
Step 6: Add rule 108 to IP policy 402. This rule will trust the incoming DSCP value of all traffic that does not match rule 105 or 106.
1 Add a rule 108 to QoS policy 402:
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 108
2 Configure rule 108 to trust the incoming DSCP value of packets:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 108)# composite-operation
trust-dscp
3 Exit IP rule mode for rule 108:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 108)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402)#
Step 7: Apply composite operation 13 to packets based on their current DSCP value:
1 Apply composite operation 13 to packets that have a DSCP value of 25:
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# dscp-table 25
W310-1(super/QoS 402/dscp 25)# composite-operation Op13
2 Exit DSCP Table mode:
W310-1(super/QoS 402/dscp 25)# exit
W310-1(super/QoS 402)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Step 8: Enable the policy on an interface, for example, interface group-1 as defined in
Example 1:
1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for group-1:
W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1
2 Enable QoS policy 401 for incoming traffic:
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 245
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 401 in
3 Enable QoS policy 402 for outgoing traffic:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 402 out
4 Exit AP-Group Interface mode:
W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# exit
W310-1(super)#
Setting Policy: Example 5
This example shows how to define the policies for the default user group.
Users first try to associate with the user-group information from the RADIUS server. If that fails, the user is associated with the user-group with SSID name. If that information is not available, the user is placed in the user-group default. This is why it is important to configure policies for the default user group. The policy-group for the default user-group is by-ip-
address.
The following policy denies default users access to networks other than the 192.168.8.x network.
Step 1: Create an IP policy:
1 Create an access control list that has an index number of 305:
W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 305
Step 2. Add rule 101 to IP policy 305. This rule will allow default users to access the
192.168.8.x network only:
2 Add rule 101 to ACL 305:
W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 101
3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are coming from members of the default user group (by-ip-address is the policy user group for the default user group):
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# source-user-group by-
ip-address
4 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the 192.168.8.x network:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)#destination-ip
192.168.8.0 0.0.0.255
5 Configure rule 101 to permit packets that match both criteria:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# composite-operation
Permit
6 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 101:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# exit
246 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 5
Step 2: Add rule 102 to IP policy 305. This rule will prevent default users from
accessing all other networks:
1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 305:
W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 102
2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are coming from members of the default user group (by-ip-address is the policy user group for the default user group):
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# source-user-group by-
ip-address
3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that have any destination:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# destination-ip any
4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (from the default user group and also have a destination other than the 192.168.8.x network).
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# composite-operation
Deny
5 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# exit
W310-1(super/ACL 305)#
Step 3: Configure a default rule 103. The default rule applies to packets that do not
match any rules in policy 305:
1 Configure the default rule to permit traffic:
W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 103
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 103)# composite-operation
Permit
2 Exit IP Rule mode:
W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 103)#
exit
W310-1(super/ACL 305)#
Step 4: Enable IP policy 305 for incoming traffic on AP group lobby:
W310-1(super)# Interface AP-Group lobby
W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# ip access-group 305 in
The policy is applied to incoming traffic using the rules defined for policy list 305.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 247
Chapter 10 Policy Commands
248 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
W310 Port Commands
This chapter describes the CLI commands that you use to configure ports on the W310:
•
•
•
set intermodule port redundancy
•
set port auto-negotiation-flowcontroladvertisement
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set port dot1x re-authenticate
•
set port dot1x re-authentication
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set port point-to-point admin status
•
•
•
set port redundancy {enable | disable}
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set port spantree force-protocolmigration
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show intermodule port redundancy
•
•
show port auto-negotiation-flowcontroladvertisement
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show port point-to-point status
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 249
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
clear port mirror
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear port mirror command to cancel a port mirror.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear port mirror [<source-module/source-port/dest-module/ dest-port>]
Syntax
source-module source-port dest-module dest-port
Description
1
Source port number
1
Destination port number
Example:
W310-1# clear port mirror 1/9/1/10 this command will delete the port mirror entry
- do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Mirroring packets from port 9 to port 10 is cleared
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch.
• Use the
command to display mirroring information for the switch.
250 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
clear port static-vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear port static-vlan command to unbind a static bound VLAN from a port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear port static-vlan <module/port range> <vlan-id>
Syntax
<module/ port range>
<vlan-id>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
The VLAN to unbind from the port
Example:
W310-1# clear port static-vlan 10 5
VLAN 5 is unbound from port 10
Related Commands:
command to assign static VLANs to ports.
set intermodule port redundancy
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set intermodule port redundancy command to define the unique port redundancy configuration of the switch. To clear the port redundancy configuration, use the set intermodule port redundancy off command.
! You must disable Spanning Tree before you can enable intermodule port redundancy.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 251
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set intermodule port redundancy <module/prim-port> <module/ second-port> {on | off} [<name>]}
Syntax Description
<module/prim-port> 1/Primary port number
<module/secondport>
1/Secondary port number on off
[<name>]
Sets the intermodule redundancy
Clears the redundancy configuration
Name of the redundancy pair (default is intermodule)
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set intermodule port redundancy 1/7 1/12 on
backbone
backbone: port 1/12 is intermodule redundant to port 1/7
Example:
W310-1# set intermodule port redundancy off
Intermodule port redundancy entry deleted.
Related Commands:
Use the
show intermodule port redundancy command to display the
intermodule port redundancy entries.
252 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement command to set the flowcontrol advertisement for a Gigabit port when performing auto negotiation.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement <module/ port> {no-flowcontrol | asym-tx-only | sym-only | sym-andasym-rx}
Syntax
<module/port> no-flowcontrol asym-tx-only sym-only sym-and-asym-rx
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
The port will advertise no pause capabilities.
The port will advertise asymmetric Tx pause capabilities only.
The port will advertise symmetric pause capabilities only.
The port will advertise both symmetric and asymmetric Rx pause capabilities.
Example:
W310-1# set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-
advertisement 1/5 asym-tx-only
Port 1/5 pause capabilities was set
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 253
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port channel
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port channel command to enable or disable a Link Aggregation Group
(LAG) interface on the switch. To create a LAG, you must specify a LAG name. There is no default name.
You can also add or remove a port from an existing LAG. When adding or removing a port to an existing LAG, type the same LAG-name. All ports in the LAG are configured with the parameters of the first port that is added to the LAG. These parameters include port administrative status, speed, duplex, auto negotiation mode, VLAN ID, tagging mode, binding mode, and priority level.
The ports added to a LAG must belong to the same LAG group.
When adding a port to an existing LAG, type the same LAG name, otherwise you will create a new LAG.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port channel [<port_list>] [on | off] <name>
Syntax
<port_list>
[on | off]
<name>
Description
A list of ports to be aggregated in the format 1/port
on enables the channel for the specified ports
off disables the channel for the specified ports
Channel name
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set port channel 1/5-6,8 on my-channel
Port 1/5 channel mode set to on 1/102
Port 1/6 was added to channel 1/102
Port 1/8 was added to channel 1/102
254 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Related Commands:
command to display Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information for a specific switch or port.
set port classification
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port classification command to set the port classification to either regular or valuable.
Setting a port to valuable means that, if a link failure occurs on the port, a link fault trap can be sent even when the port is disabled and a fast aging operation on the CAM table is performed. This feature is particularly useful for the link/intermodule redundancy application, where you need to be informed of link failures on dormant ports and quickly resume traffic.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port classification <module/port> {regular | valuable}
Syntax Description
<module/port> 1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
{regular | valuable} port classification
Example:
W310-1# set port classification 1/15 valuable
Port 1/19 classification has been changed.
Related Commands:
Use the show port classification
command to display a port’s classification: valuable or regular.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 255
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port disable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port disable command to disable a port or range of ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port disable <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1# set port disable 1/1
Port 1/1 disabled.
256 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port dot1x initialize
Use the set port dot1x initialize command to initialize port dot1x.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x initialize <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x initialize 1/3 port 1/2 dot1x was initialized
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 257
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port dot1x max-req
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x max-req command to set the maximum number of times the port tries to retransmit requests to the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x max-req <module/port> <count>
Syntax
<module/port>
<count>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Number of attempts. The valid range is 1 to 10.
Example:
W310-1> set port dot1x max-req 1/2 5
258 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port dot1x port-control
Use the set port dot1x port-control command to set the dot1x parameter per port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x port-control <module/port> {force-unauthorize | auto | force-authorize}
Syntax Description
<module/port>
{force-unauthorize | auto | forceauthorize}
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
force-unauthorize - the port is always in blocking state
auto - forwarding or blocking state depends on authorization outcome
force-authorize - the port is always in forwarding state
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x port-control 1/3 force-
authorize
port 1/3 control was set to force-authorize
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 259
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port dot1x quiet-period
Use the set port dot1x quiet-period command to set the 802.1x quiet period per port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x quiet-period <module/port> <seconds>
Syntax
<module/port>
<seconds>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Number of seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x quiet-period 1/2 300
260 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port dot1x re-authenticate
Use the set port dot1x re-authenticate command to set the port to reauthenticate.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authenticate <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authenticate 1/2 port 1/2 is not in authenticating process
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 261
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port dot1x re-authentication
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x re-authentication command to enable or disable reauthentication per port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authentication <module/port> {enable | disable}
Syntax
<module/port>
{enable | disable}
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Enables for disables reauthentication.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authentication 1/2 enable port 1/2 re-authenticate was set to enable
262 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port dot1x re-authperiod
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x re-authperiod command to set the idle time between reauthentication attempts before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authperiod <module/port> <seconds>
Syntax
<module/port>
<seconds>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Period in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authperiod 1/2 400
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 263
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port dot1x server-timeout
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x server-timeout command to set the time to wait for a reply from the Authentication Server before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x server-timeout <module/port> <seconds>
Syntax
<module/port> seconds
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Timeout in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x server timeout 1/2 400
264 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port dot1x supp-timeout
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x supp-timeout command to set the time for the port to wait for a reply from the Authentication Server before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x supp-timeout <module/port> <seconds>
Syntax
<module/port>
<seconds>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Timeout in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x supp-timeout 1/2 400
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 265
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port dot1x tx-period
User level: supervisor
Use the set port dot1x tx-period command to set the time interval between attempts to access the Authenticated Station.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x tx-period <module/port> <seconds>
Syntax
<module/port>
<seconds>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Interval in seconds. The valid range is 0-65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set port dot1x quiet-period 1/2 5000
266 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port duplex
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port duplex command to configure the duplex type of an Ethernet or Fast
Ethernet port or range of ports. You can configure Ethernet and Fast Ethernet interfaces to either full duplex or half duplex.
The duplex status of a port in auto-negotiation mode is determined by auto-negotiation. An error message is generated if you attempt to set the transmission type of auto negotiation Fast
Ethernet ports to half- or full-duplex mode.
! Ports 51, 52 (Gigabit SFP ports) work in Full duplex mode only. An error message is generated if you attempt to change these ports to half-duplex.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port duplex <module/port> {full | half}
Syntax
<module/port> full half
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Set full-duplex transmission
Set half-duplex transmission
Example:
To set port 1 to full duplex:
W310-1# set port duplex 1/1 full
Port 1/1 set to full-duplex.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 267
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port edge admin state
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port edge admin state command to set the port as an RSTP edge-port or non-edge-port.
An edge port is not connected to any other bridge. Only edge ports and point-to-point links can rapidly transition to forwarding state.
If you set edge admin state to edge-port, the oper state field of the
command is also set to edge-port. However, if the port receives a BPDU, the oper
state setting changes to non-edge-port. (To receive a BPDU, the port must be connected to a bridge and thus is not an edge port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port edge admin state <module/port> {edge-port | non-edgeport}
Syntax Description
<module/port>
{edge-port | nonedge-port}
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
The administrative edge port state of the port:
• edge-port
• non-edge port
268
Examples:
W310-1# set port edge admin state 1/1 edge-port port 1/1 edge admin state is set to edge-port
W310-1# set port edge admin state 1/1 non-edge-port port 1/1 edge admin state is set to non-edge-port
Related Commands:
Use the
command to show a port’s administrative and
operational edge state.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port enable command to enable a port or a range of ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port enable <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1# set port enable 1/1
Port 1/1 enabled.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 269
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port flowcontrol
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port flowcontrol command to set the send/receive mode for flowcontrol frames (IEEE 802.3x or proprietary) for a full duplex port. Each direction (send or receive) can be configured separately.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port flowcontrol {receive | send | all} <module/port> {off
| on | proprietary}
Syntax
receive send all
<module/port> off
Description
Indicates the ability of the port to receive administrative status from a remote device.
Available only for Gigabit Ethernet ports with negotiation set to off.
Indicates the ability of the port to send administrative status to a remote device.
Available only for Gigabit Ethernet ports with negotiation set to off.
Indicates the ability of the port to both send and receive administrative status (symmetric flow control).
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Disables the port from receiving or sending administrative status:
• set port flowcontrol receive <module/ port> off
disables receiving of administrative status.
• set port flowcontrol send <module/port> off disables sending of administrative status.
• set port flowcontrol all <module/port> off
disables both receiving and sending of administrative status.
1 of 2
270 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Syntax
on proprietary
Description
Enables the port to receive and send administrative status:
• set port flowcontrol receive <module/ port> on enables receiving of administrative status.
• set port flowcontrol send <module/port> on enables sending of administrative status.
• set port flowcontrol all <module/port> on enables both receiving and sending of administrative status.
Flow control for full duplex on 10Base-T and 100Base-T ports.
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1# set port flowcontrol receive 1/1 on
Port 1/1 flow control receive administration status set to on
Related Commands:
command to display flow control information for a port.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 271
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port level
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port level command to set the priority of a port or range of ports on the switching bus. Packets traveling through a port set at normal priority are served only after packets traveling through a port set at high priority are served.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port level <module/port> <value>
Syntax
<module/port>
<value>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Priority (0-7).
Example:
W310-1# set port level 1/1 5
Port 1/1 level set to 5
272 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port mirror
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port mirror command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch. Use
command to cancel a port mirror.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port mirror source-port <module/port> mirror-port <module/ port> sampling always direction <direction>
Syntax
<module/port>
{rx | both}
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Direction of traffic that you want to mirror:
• rx mirrors only incoming traffic.
• both mirrors both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Example:
W310-1# set port mirror source-port 1/9 mirror-port 1/10
sampling always direction both
Mirroring both Rx and Tx packets from port 1/9 to port 1/10 is enabled
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to display mirroring information for the switch.
• Use the
command to cancel a port mirror.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 273
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port name
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port name command to configure a name for a port. If you do not specify a name, the port name remains blank.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port name <module/port> [<name>]
Syntax
<module/port>
[<name>]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Name (up to 16 characters)
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set port name 1/12 arthur
Port 1/12 name set.
274 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port negotiation
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port negotiation command to enable or disable the link negotiation protocol on the specified port. This command is available on Fast Ethernet or Gigabit
Ethernet ports.
• When negotiation is enabled, the speed and duplex of the Fast Ethernet ports are determined by auto-negotiation.
• If negotiation is disabled, the user can set the speed and duplex of the Fast Ethernet ports.
For Fiber Gigabit Ethernet ports it can determine the flow control (pause) mode only.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port negotiation <module/port> {enable | disable}
Syntax
<module/port> enable disable
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Enables port negotiation protocol.
Disables port negotiation protocol.
Example:
To disable auto negotiation on port 1:
W310-1# set port negotiation 1/1 disable
Link negotiation protocol disabled on port 1/1.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 275
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port point-to-point admin status
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port point-to-point admin status command to specify whether a port is connected to a shared LAN segment or a point-to-point LAN segment. A point-topoint LAN segment is connected to exactly one other bridge (normally with a direct cable between them). Only point-to-point links and edge ports can rapidly transition to forwarding state.
If you set this field to Auto, the switch automatically detects whether the port is connected to a shared link or a point-to-point link. Ports operating in half duplex are set to non-point-topoint, and ports operating in full duplex are set to point-to-point. You can, however, manually set the type of link.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port point-to-point admin status <module/port> {force-true
| force-false | auto}
Syntax
<module/port> force-true force-false auto
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Defines the port as connected to a point-to-point link.
Defines the port as connected to a shared LAN segment.
Automatically detects whether the port is connected to a shared link or a point-to-point link. Ports operating in half duplex are set to non-point-to-point, and ports operating in full duplex are set to point-to-point
If you select this setting, the point-to-point oper state
field of the show port point-to-point status
command displays the link type that is detected.
276 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Example:
W310-1# set port point-to-point admin status 1/1 force-true port 1/1 point to point admin status is set to force-true
set port powerinline
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port powerinline command to enable or disable the load detection process and power delivery for the port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port powerinline <module/port> {enable | disable}
Syntax
<module/port> enable disable
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Enables load detection process for port.
Disables load detection process for port.
Example:
W310-1# set port powerinline 1/1-3 enable
Load detection process on ports 1/1-3 is enabled
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 277
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port powerinline priority
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port powerinline priority command to configure the priority for powering the port. Possible values are Critical, High, and Low. At power on, all ports are set to Low Priority.
Within each group, the lowest port number has the highest priority. For example, within ports 1 to 8, port 1 has the highest priority although its priority is lower than port 9 which belongs to High priority group.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port powerinline priority <module/port> {low | high | critical}
Syntax
<module/port>
{low | high | critical}
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Priority for powering the port or port range.
Example:
W310-1# set port powerinline priority 1/3 High
Powering priority on port/s 1/3 was set to High
278 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port redundancy {enable | disable}
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port redundancy {enable | disable} command to globally enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined. This command does not delete the existing redundancy entries from NVRAM.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy {enable | disable}
Example:
W310-1# set port redundancy enable
All redundancy schemes are now enabled
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to define or remove redundancy pairs.
• Use the
command to display information about the port redundancy pairs defined for the switch.
set port redundancy
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port redundancy command to define or remove redundancy pairs. A port redundancy member can be any port (including LAG logical port) that is not a member of a LAG or another redundancy pair.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 279
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy <module/prim_port> <module/second_port>
{on | off} [<redundancy_name>]
Syntax Description
<module/prim_port> on off
1/primary port number of redundancy pair. For example, to specify port 1, type 1/1
Enables the redundancy pair.
Disables the redundancy pair.
<module/second_port> 1/secondary port number of redundancy pair. For example, to specify port 1, type 1/1
[<redundancy_name>] Name for the redundancy pair.
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set port redundancy 1/7 1/12 on red1 uplink: Port 1/12 is redundant to port 1/7.
Port redundancy is active - entry is effective immediately
Related Commands:
• Use the
set port redundancy {enable | disable}
command to globally enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined.
• Use the
command to display information about the port
redundancy pairs defined for the switch.
280 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port redundancy-intervals
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port redundancy-intervals command to configure the two timers that control redundancy switchover:
• Minimum interval between switchovers—Minimum time (in seconds) between the failure of the primary port link and switchover to the secondary (backup) port.
• Switchback interval—Minimum time (in seconds) that the primary port link must be up
(following failure) before the system switches back to the primary port.
If the switchback interval is zero, the system never switches back. If it is one, switchback occurs immediately after the primary port link returns.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy-intervals <min-time-between-switchovers>
{<switchback-interval> | none}
Syntax Description
<min-time-betweenswitchovers>
Minimum time (in seconds) between the failure of the primary port link and switchover to the secondary (backup) port.
<switchback-interval> Minimum time (in seconds) that the primary port link must be up (following failure) before the system switches back to the primary port.
If the switchback interval is zero, the system never switches back. If it is one, switchback occurs immediately after the primary port link returns.
none The system switches back only if the secondary link fails.
Example:
W310-1# set port redundancy-intervals 100 20
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 281
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port spantree cost
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port spantree cost command to set the cost of a port. This value defines which port will be allowed to forward traffic if two ports with different costs cause a loop.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port spantree cost <module/port> {auto | <value>}
Syntax
<module/port> auto
<value>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Spantree cost is calculated according to the standard
Number representing the cost. The cost level can be set from 1 to
65535 / 200000000 in STP / RSTP, respectively. A lower cost
(lower value) specifies precedence of a port to forward traffic.
Example:
W310-1# set port spantree cost 1/2 4096 port 1/2 spantree cost is 4096
282 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port spantree disable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port spantree disable command to disable the spanning tree mode for specific switch ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port spantree disable <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1# set port spantree disable 1/1 port 1/1 was disabled on spantree
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 283
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port spantree enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port spantree enable command to enable the spanning tree mode for specific switch ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port spantree enable <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1# set port spantree enable 1/1 port 1/1 was enabled on spantree
set port spantree force-protocol-migration
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port spantree force-protocol-migration command to force a bridge port to send out RSTP BPDUs. By forcing a bridge port to send RSTP BPDUs, you can determine whether legacy 802.1D bridges are present on a LAN segment.
If you remove a legacy 802.1D bridge from a segment, other RSTP bridges on the segment cannot detect the removal so they continue sending STP BPDUs. However, if you force a bridge port to send RSTP BPDUs, they trigger other RSTP bridges on the segment to generate RSTP BPDUs again.
If the switch is running common Spanning Tree, this command has no effect.
284 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port spantree force-protocol-migration <module/port>
Syntax
<module/port>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
W310-1# set port spantree force-protocol-migration 1/1 port 1/1 is forced to send a Rapid spanning tree BPDU
set port spantree priority
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port spantree command to set the Spanning Tree priority of a port. This value defines the priority of a port to be blocked if two ports with the same costs cause a loop.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port spantree priority <module/port> <value>
Syntax
<module/port>
<value>
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Number representing the priority of the bridge. The priority can range from 0 to 24 in increments of 16. 0 indicates high priority and 240 indicates low priority. The default value is 128.
! Priority value 0 will set the port to Root port.
285
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Example:
W310-1# set port spantree priority 1/4 128 port 1/4 spantree priority is 128
set port speed
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port speed command to configure the speed of a port or range of 10/
100BASE-T ports.
In auto-negotiation mode, the port's speed is determined by auto negotiation. An error message is generated if you attempt to set the speed when auto negotiation is enabled
! This command cannot be executed on ports 51, 52 (Gigabit SFP ports). An error message is generated if you attempt to perform the set port speed command for these ports that can only work at 1000 Mbps speed.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port speed <module/port> {10MB | 100MB | 1GB}
Syntax Description
<module/port>
{10MB | 100MB
| 1GB}
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
10MB – 10 Mbps (Ethernet)
100MB – 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet)
1GB – 1 Gbps (Gigabit Ethernet)
Example:
To set the speed of port 1 to 100 Mbps
W310-1# set port speed 1/1 100MB
Port 1/1 speed set to 100 Mbps.
286 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port static-vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port static-vlan command to assign static VLANs to ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port static-vlan <module/port range> <vlan-id>
Syntax
<module/port range>
<vlan-id>
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
ID of VLAN to bind to port.
Example:
W310-1# set port static-vlan 1/4-6 2
VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/4
VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/5
VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/6
Related Commands:
Use the clear port static-vlan
command to unbind a static bound VLAN from a port.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 287
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port trap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port trap command to enable or disable generic SNMP uplink or downlink traps from a port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port trap <module/port> {enable | disable}
Syntax
<module/port range> enable disable
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Enable uplink/downlink traps.
Disable uplink/downlink traps.
Example:
W310-1# set port trap 1/2 enable
Port 1/2 up/down trap enabled.
288 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set port vlan
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port vlan command to set the port VLAN ID (PVID). If adding a new
VLAN, the VLAN number must be within the range of 1 to 3071.
! You must define a VLAN before setting a port VLAN ID.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port vlan <vlan_num> <module/port>
Syntax
<vlan_num>
<module/port>
Description
Number identifying the VLAN.
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Example:
To set VLAN 850 to include ports 4 through 7.
W310-1# set port vlan 850 1/4-7
VLAN 850 modified.
VLAN Mod/Ports
---- -----------------------
850 1/4-7
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 289
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
set port vlan-binding-mode
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set port vlan-binding-mode command to define the VLAN binding method used by ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set port vlan-binding-mode <module/port range> {static | bindto-configured | bind-to-all}
Syntax Description
<module/port range>
{static | bind-toconfigured | bind-toall}
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
VLAN binding method:
• static - the port supports only the VLAN as configured per port.
• bind-to-configured - the port supports the VLANs configured on the switch.
• bind-to-all - the port supports the all VLANs known to the switch.
Example:
W310-1# set port vlan-binding-mode 1/5-9 static
Set Port vlan binding method:1/5
Set Port vlan binding method:1/6
Set Port vlan binding method:1/7
Set Port vlan binding method:1/8
Set Port vlan binding method:1/9
290 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
set trunk
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set trunk command to configure the VLAN tagging mode of a port. When
VLAN tagging mode is set to dot1q, all frames transmitted from the port are tagged with an
IEEE 802.1Q-compliant tag. This tag identifies the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set trunk <module/port> {off | dot1q}
Syntax
<module/port> off dot1q
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
Frames transmitted from the port are untagged.
Frames transmitted from the port are tagged with a IEEE
802.1Q-compliant tag.
Example:
W310-1# set trunk 1/3 dot1q
Dot1Q VLAN tagging set on port 1/3.
Related Commands:
command to display VLAN tagging information for the switch.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 291
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show intermodule port redundancy
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show intermodule redundancy command to display the intermodule port redundancy entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show intermodule port redundancy
Example:
W310-1> show intermodule port redundancy
Primary-Port : 1/1
Primary-Port status : Disable
Secondary-Port : 1/2
Secondary-Port status : Disable
Related Commands:
Use the
set intermodule port redundancy
command to define the unique port
redundancy configuration of the switch
show port
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port command to display port status.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
292 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Example: to display the status for port 4.
W310-1> show port 4
Port Name Status Vlan Level Neg Dup. Spd. Type
------ ----------- --------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ---- -----------------
1/4 Gregory no link 1 0 enable half 10M 10/100BaseTx Port
Output Fields:
Field
Port
Name
Status
Vlan
Level
Neg
Dup
Speed
Type
Description
Switch number (always 1) and port number
Name of port
Status of the port (connected, no link, disabled)
VLAN ID of the port
Priority of the port (0-7)
The autonegotiation status of the port (enabled, disabled)
Duplex setting for the port (full, half)
Speed setting for the port (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps)
Port type, for example:
• 10/100Base-Tx, 1000Base-SX Port, Link Aggregation Group of
10/100Base-T ports
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 293
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement command to display the flowcontrol advertisement for a Gigabit port used to perform autonegotiation.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement
[<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-
advertisement
Port 1/1 advertises no flow control capabilities.
Port 1/2 advertises no flow control capabilities.
Port 1/3 advertises no flow control capabilities.
294 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show port channel
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port channel command to display Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information for a specific switch or port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port channel [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]] [info]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
[info]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Display port information
Example:
W310-1> show port channel
Port Channel Status Channel Name Channel Id
------ --------------- ---------------- ----------------
1/1 on MEIR 1/101
1/2 on MEIR 1/101
1/3 off
1/4 off
1/5 on my-channel 1/102
1/6 on my-channel 1/102
1/7 off
1/8 on my-channel 1/102
W310-1> show port channel 1/3 info
Port Speed Duplex Vlan Port Trunk Vlan
Priority status Binding
------ ------ ------- ----- --------- -------- --------
1/1 10 half 1 0 off static
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 295
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Related Commands:
Use the
command to enable or disable a Link Aggregation Group
(LAG) interface on the switch.
show port classification
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show port classification command to display a port’s classification: valuable or regular.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port classification [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port classification 1/8
Port Port Classification
------ ---------------------
1/8 regular
W310-1> show port classification 1/9
Port Port Classification
------ ---------------------
1/9 valuable
Related Commands:
Use the
command to set the port classification to either
regular or valuable.
296 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show port dot1x
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port dot1x command to display all configuration settings of the authenticator port access entity (PAE) and backend authenticator.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show dot1x [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port dot1x 1/3
Port Auth BEnd Port Port Re Quiet ReAuth Server Supp Tx Max
Number State State Control Status Auth Priod Priod Tmeout Tmeout Priod Req
------ ------ ------ -------- ------ ---- ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---
1/3 Init Init Auto Unauth Disa 60 3600 30 30 30 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 297
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Output Fields:
Field
Port Number
Auth State
298
BEnd Stat
Port Control
Port Status
Description
Always 1/port number
The Port Access Entity state. Possible states include:
• Initialize
• Disconnected
• Connecting
• Authenticating
• Authenticated
• Aborting
• Held
• ForceAuth
• ForceUnauth
The current state od the Backend
Authentication state machine. Possible states include:
• Request
• Response
• Success
• Fail
• Timeout
• Idle
• Init
Port control type.
Valid values include:
• force-authorized
• force-unauthorized
• auto
The current value of the controlled port status.
Possible states include:
• Authorized
• Unauthorized
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Field
Re Auth
Quiet Period
ReAuth Period
Server Tmout
Supp Tmeout
Tx Priod
Max Req
Chapter 11
Description
The state of reauthentication on the port.
Possible states include:
• Enabled - The port connection is reauthenticated after the reAuthPeriod.
• Disabled - The port connection is not reauthenticated. The reAuthPeriod is ignored.
The amount of time, in seconds, between sending authentication requests.
The time, in seconds, after which the port connection should be reauthenticated.
The amount of time, in seconds, the W310 waits for a response from the RADIUS server.
The amount of time, in seconds, before resending authentication requests.
The amount of time, in seconds, in which an authentication request must be answered.
The maximum number of times a request for authentication is sent before timing out.
2 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 299
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port dot1x statistics
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port dot1x statistics command to display all port dot1x statistics.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port dot1x statistics [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port dot1x statistics 1/1
Port Tx_Req/Id Tx_Req Tx_Total Rx_Start Rx_Logff Rx_Resp/Id Rx_Resp
------ --------- -------- --------- -------- -------- ---------- ---------
1/1 2 5 0 0 0 0 0
Port Rx_Invalid Rx_Len_Err Rx_Total Last_Rx_Frm_Ver Last_Rx_Frm_Src_Mac
------ ---------- ---------- --------- --------------- -------------------
1/1 0 0 0 0 1d-80-00-00-00-00
300 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show port edge state
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the show port edge state command to show a port’s administrative and operational edge state.
! You can set the administrative edge state of a port to edge port, but if the port receives a
BPDU, the operational state changes to non-edge port. (To receive a BPDU, the port must be connected to a bridge and thus is not an edge port.
The syntax for this command is: show port edge state [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port edge state 1/1-2
Port admin state oper state
------- ------------- -------------
1/1 edge-port edge-port
1/2 non-edge-port non-edge-port
Related Commands:
Use the set port edge admin state
command to set the port as an RSTP edge-port or non-edge-port.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 301
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port flowcontrol
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port flowcontrol command to display flow control information for a port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port flowcontrol [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port flowcontrol 1/4
Port Send-Flowcontrol Receive-Flowcontrol
Admin Oper Admin Oper
------ ----- ---- ----- ----
1/4 off off off off
Output Fields
Field
Port
Send-Flowcontrol-
Admin
Description
1/port number
Send flow-control administration. Possible settings:
• ON indicates that the local port is allowed to send flow control frames to the far end.
• OFF indicates that the local port is not allowed to send flow control frames to the far end.
1 of 2
302 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
Field
Send-Flowcontrol-
Oper
Receive-
Flowcontrol-
Admin
Receive-
Flowcontrol- Oper
Description
Send flow-control operation mode. Possible modes:
• ON indicates that the local port will send flow control frames to the far end.
• OFF indicates that the local port will not send flow control frames to the far end.
Receive flow-control administration. Possible settings:
• ON indicates that the local port will act upon flow control indications if received from the far end.
• OFF indicates that the local port will discard flow control frames if received from the far end.
Receive flow-control operation mode. Possible modes:
• ON indicates that the local port will act upon flow control indications received from the far end.
• OFF indicates that the local port will discard flow control frames received from the far end.
2 of 2
Related Commands:
command to set the send/receive mode for flowcontrol frames (IEEE 802.3x or proprietary) for a full duplex port.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 303
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port mirror
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port mirror command to display mirroring information for the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port mirror
Example:
W310-1> show port mirror port mirroring
--------------
Mirroring both Rx and Tx packets from port 1/2 to port 1/4 is enabled
W310-1> show port mirror port mirroring
--------------
No ports are mirrored
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch.
• Use the
command to cancel a port mirror.
304 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show port point-to-point status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port point-to-point status command to show a port’s administrative and operational point-to-point status.
! If you set the administrative point-to-point status to auto, the operational status is the
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port point-to-point status [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port point-to-point status
Port point-to-point admin state point-to-point oper state
------- ---------------------------- --------------------------
1/1 auto point to point connection
1/2 auto point to point connection
1/3 auto point to point connection
1/4 auto point to point connection
1/5 auto point to point connection
1/6 auto point to point connection
1/7 auto point to point connection
Related Commands:
• Use the
set port point-to-point admin status
command to specify whether a port is connected to a shared LAN segment or a point-to-point LAN segment.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 305
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port redundancy
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port redundancy command to display information about the port redundancy pairs defined for the switch. The Status column displays which of the two redundancy member ports is enabled currently.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port redundancy
Example:
W310-1> show port redundancy
Redundancy Name Primary Port Secondary Port Status
----------------- -------------- ---------------- ------
-gregory 1/1 1/2 secondary reuven 1/3 1/4 secondary meir 1/6 1/10 primary arie 1/9 1/16 secondary
Port Redundancy global state is enable
Minimum Time between Switchovers: 1
Switchback interval: 3
Related Commands:
• Use the
set port redundancy {enable | disable}
enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined.
• Use the
command to define or remove redundancy pairs.
306 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show port trap
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port trap command to display information on SNMP generic link up/ down traps sent for a specific port.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port trap [<module>[/<port>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port trap 4/1
Port 4/1 up/down trap is disabled
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 307
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
show port vlan-binding-mode
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show port-vlan-binding command to display the VLAN binding setting for a port. For a definition of each mode, see the
command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show port vlan-binding-mode [module[/port]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show port vlan-binding-mode port 1/1 is statically bound port 1/2 is statically bound port 1/3 is statically bound port 1/4 is statically bound port 1/5 is statically bound port 1/6 is statically bound port 1/7 is statically bound port 1/8 is statically bound port 1/9 is statically bound port 1/10 is statically bound
308 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 11
show trunk
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show trunk command to display VLAN tagging information for the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show trunk [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show trunk 1/1
Port
-----
41/1
41/2
Mode
----off dot1q
Binding modeNative vlan
---------------------------statically bound1 statically bound2
Output Fields:
Field
Port
Mode
Binding mode
Native VLAN
Description
1/port number
Tag status of the port:
• dot1q—802.1Q tagging mode
• off—clear mode).
Binding mode of the port
Number of the Port VLAN ID (the VLAN to which received untagged traffic will be assigned).
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 309
Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands
Related Commands:
Use the
set trunk command to configure the VLAN tagging mode of a port.
310 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure wireless authentication and security. The W310 supports open authentication, WEP encryption, 802.1x authentication, and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA):
•
•
•
inter-wireless-gateways-secret
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set dot1x system-auth-control disable
•
set dot1x system-auth-control enable
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 311
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
clear dot1x config
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Disables dot1x on all ports and restores the default settings.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear dot1x config
Example:
W310-1# clear dot1x config
Original Configuration was Restored
dynamic-rekeying-interval
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the dynamic-rekeying-interval command to set the encryption rekeying interval in seconds for either the 802.1x or WiFi Protected Access (WPA).
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] dynamic-rekeying-interval <interval>
Syntax
<interval>
Description
The minimum number of seconds for the rekeying interval is 60 seconds and the maximum is 65535. The default value is 3600.
312
Example:
To set the encryption rekeying interval:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# dynamic-rekeying-interval
900
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
To reset the encryption rekeying interval to the default:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no dynamic-rekeying-interval
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
inter-wireless-gateways-secret
User level: supervisor
Use the inter-wireless-gateways-secret command to set the secret used for the following types of communication.
• gateway-to-gateway and
• gateway-to-LAP communications.
Caution: This command is implemented immediately after you make your entries and press Enter.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the secret default value.
Syntax:
[no] inter-wireless-gateways-secret <secret> <re-type>
The syntax for this command is:
Syntax
<secret>
<retype>
Description
Secret used in communications between gateways and a gateway to a LAP. This can use up to 32 characters. The secret displays as asterisks.
Retype the secret exactly as you did for the secret parameter. The retyped secret displays as asterisks.
Example:
W310-1(super)# inter-wireless-gateways-secret **** ****
Done!
W310-1(super)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 313
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
security-mode
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the security-mode command to configure the security mode type for the wireless network (SSID). If you do not specify a mode, the current security mode for the wireless network is displayed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the security mode to its default value (none).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] security-mode {none | dot1x | wep | wpa-psk | wpa}
Syntax Description
{none | dot1x | wep | wpa | wpa-psk}
Configure the security mode for one of the following:
• none - no security. This is the default entry.
• dot1x - 802.1x security
• wpa - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that calls for 802.1x unique keys
• wpa-psk - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that uses a preshared key (PSK)
• wep - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption keys.
Example:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# security-mode wep
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
314 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
set dot1x max-req
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x max-req command to set the maximum number of times the port tries to retransmit requests to the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x max-req <count>
Syntax
<count>
Description
Number of attempts.The range is 1 to 10.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x max-req 3
Done!
set dot1x quiet-period
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x quiet-period command to set the minimal time between authentication attempts.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x quiet-period <Seconds>
Syntax
<Seconds>
Description
Quiet period in seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 315
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x quiet-period 90
Done!
set dot1x re-authperiod
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x re-authperiod command to set the idle time between reauthentication attempts.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x re-authperiod <Seconds>
Syntax
<Seconds>
Description
Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x re-authperiod 90
Done!
316 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
set dot1x server-timeout
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x server-timeout command to set the server retransmission timeout period for all ports. This is the maximum time that the port will wait for a reply from the
Authentication Server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x server-timeout <Seconds>
Syntax
<Seconds>
Description
Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x server-timeout 90
set dot1x supp-timeout
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x supp-timeout command to set the maximum time that the switch will wait for a reply from the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x supp-timeout <Seconds>
Syntax
<Seconds>
Description
Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x supp-timeout 90
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 317
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
set dot1x system-auth-control disable
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x system-auth-control disable command to globally disable the Port Based Network Access Control (PBNAC) (802.1x) feature.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x system-auth-control disable
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control disable dot1x system-auth-control disabled
set dot1x system-auth-control enable
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x system-auth-control enable command to globally enable the PBNAC (802.1x) feature.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x system-auth-control enable
Examples:
• When a RADIUS server is defined:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control enable dot1x system-auth-control enabled
318
• When a RADIUS server is not defined:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control enable
*** Warning : Authentication server ( RADIUS ) is disabled/ not-exist and so,
*** no authentication can be made dot1x system-auth-control enabled
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
set dot1x tx-period
User level: supervisor
Use the set dot1x tx-period command to set the time interval between attempts to access the Authenticated Station.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set dot1x tx-period <Seconds>
Syntax
<Seconds>
Description
Number of seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set dot1x tx-period 90
Done!
show dot1x
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show dot1x command to display the system dot1x capabilities, protocol version, and timer values.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show dot1x
Example:
W310-1> show dot1x mode
PAE Capabilities Authenticator Only
Protocol Version 1 system-auth-control disabled
*** Warning : Authentication server ( RADIUS ) is disabled/not-exist and so,
*** no authentication can be made
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 319
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
show dot1x statistics
User level: read-only, read-write, admin.
Use the show dot1x statistics command to display Rx and Tx EAPOL and EAP statistics.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show dot1x statistics
Example:
W310-1> show dot1x statistics
Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP
Total Start Logoff Invalid Resp/Id Resp LenError
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP
Total Req/Id Req
-------- -------- --------
0 0 0
wep-encryption-key
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the wep-encryption-key command to enable or disable encryption for the wireless interface. This entry displays as asterisks.
! Only one SSID in the SSID Table can have more than one WEP encryption key set. For all other SSIDs, you can set only one WEP encryption key and that key must be WEP
Key 1 only.
320 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 12
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: wep-encryption-key <index> <key>
Syntax
<index>
<key>
Description
Encryption Key 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default is 1.
Encryption string. The supported key lengths are:
• Up to five (5) characters for 64 bit
• Up to 13 characters for 128 bit
• Up to 16 characters for 152 bit
Example:
To set an encryption key:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key 3 AAAA
Done!
wep-encryption-key-effective
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the encryption-key-effective command to indicate which encryption key (0,
1, 2, or 3) to use for wireless data transmission.
Use the [no] form of this command to return the effective encryption key to its default.
Syntax:
[no] wep-encryption-key-effective <index>
Syntax
index
Description
Encryption key (1, 2, 3, or 4) that will be used to encrypt data that is sent via the wireless interface. The default value is 1.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 321
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
Example:
To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# encryption-key-effective 3
Done!
To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no encryption-key-effective
Done!
wep-keys-format
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the wep-keys-format command to set the WEP key format to Hexadecimal.
Use the [no] form of this command to return the key format to the ASCII default.
Syntax:
[no] wep-keys-format <ascii | hex>
Syntax
ascii hex
Description
• For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 5 ASCII characters.
• For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 13 ASCII characters.
• For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 16 ASCII characters.
• For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F).
• For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal characters.
• For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal characters.
322 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Example:
To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-keys-format hex
Done!
To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no wep-keys-format
Done!
Chapter 12
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 323
Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands
324 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 13
SNMP Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure SNMP on the W310:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
clear snmp trap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear snmp trap command to clear an entry from the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) trap receiver table.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear snmp trap {<rcvr_addr> | all}
Syntax
<rcvr_addr> all
Description
IP address or IP alias of the trap receiver (the SNMP management station) to clear
Keyword that specifies every entry in the SNMP trap receiver table
Example:
W310-1# clear snmp trap 192.168.173.42
SNMP trap deleted.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 325
Chapter 13 SNMP Commands
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.
• Use the
show snmp command to display SNMP information.
set snmp community
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set snmp community command to set or modify the switch’s SNMP community strings.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set snmp community {read-only | read-write | trap} [community string]
Syntax
{read-only | read-write | trap}
[community string]
Description
Access permission of the community string.
Name of the community string. If you do not specify a community string name, the configured community string is cleared.
Example:
W310-1# set snmp community read-only read
SNMP read-only community string set
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display SNMP information.
326 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 13
set snmp retries
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set snmp retries command to set the number of retries initiated by the W310
Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the switch.
The valid range is 0 to 10. The default setting is 1.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set snmp retries <number>
Syntax
<number>
Description
Number of retries
Example:
W310-1# set snmp retries 10
SNMP retries is set to 10
Related Commands:
command to display the number of retries initiated by the
W310 Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the device.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 327
Chapter 13 SNMP Commands
set snmp timeout
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set snmp timeout command to set the SNMP time-out in seconds. This command is useful for access using the W310 Manager.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set snmp timeout <number>
Syntax
<number>
Description
Timeout in seconds
Example:
W310-1# set snmp timeout 2000 the SNMP Timeout is set to 2000
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the default SNMP time-out in
seconds.
set snmp trap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set snmp trap command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.
First add the trap receiver and then enable or disable the different traps for the receiver.
328 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 13
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set snmp trap <rcvr_addr> set snmp trap <rcvr_addr> {enable | disable} [all | config | fault |...]
Syntax
<rcvr_addr> enable disable all config fault
Description
IP address or IP alias of the system to receive SNMP traps
Activate SNMP traps
Deactivate SNMP traps
(Optional) Specify all trap types
(Optional) Specify the ConfigChange trap from the TRAP-MIB.
(Optional) Specify the Fault trap from the TRAP-MIB.
Example:
To enable SNMP ConfigChange traps to a specific manager:
W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 enable config
SNMP config change traps enabled.
Example:
To enable all traps to a specific manager:
W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 enable all
SNMP all traps enabled.
Example:
To disable SNMP config traps to a specific manager:
W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 disable config
SNMP config traps disabled.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 329
Chapter 13 SNMP Commands
Example:
To add an entry in the SNMP trap receiver table with default:
W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42
SNMP trap receiver added.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to clear an SNMP trap receiver.
• Use the
show snmp command to display SNMP information.
set snmp trap auth
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set snmp trap auth command to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps upon SNMP authentication failure.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set snmp trap {enable | disable} auth
Example:
W310-1# set snmp trap enable auth
Authentication trap enabled
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display SNMP information.
show snmp
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show snmp command to display SNMP information.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show snmp
330 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 13
Example:
W310-1> show snmp
Authentication trap disabled
Community-Access Community-String
---------------- ---------------read-only public read-write public trap public
Trap-Rec-Address Status Traps Configured
---------------- -------- ----------------
192.138.40.59 Enabled config
fault
trafic_threshold
module_De-Enrollment
module_Enrollment delete_SW_redundancy_entry
create_SW_redundancy_entry
temperature_warning
general_threshold
cam_change
duplicate_ip ip_vlan_violation link_aggregation_connection_fault link_aggregation_connection_return link_aggregation_partial_fault link_aggregation_partial_return link_aggregation_auto_neg_fault link_aggregation_auto_neg_fault_return
delete_lag
create_new_lag
active_policy_list_change policy_access_control_violation
PSU_module_fault
PSU_module_fault_return
fans_module_fault
fans_module_fault_return
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 331
Chapter 13 SNMP Commands
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to set or modify the switch’s SNMP
community strings.
• Use the
set snmp trap command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table
and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.
• Use the
command to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps upon SNMP authentication failure.
show snmp retries
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show snmp retries command to display the number of retries initiated by the
W310 Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show snmp retries
Example:
W310-1> show snmp retries the SNMP Retries Number is 3
Related Commands:
command to set the number of retries initiated by the W310
Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the switch.
332 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 13
show snmp timeout
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show snmp timeout command to display the default SNMP time-out in seconds.
! This command is useful for access using the Device Manager.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show snmp timeout
Example:
W310-1> show snmp timeout the SNMP Timeout is 2000
Related Commands:
command to set the SNMP time-out in seconds.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 333
Chapter 13 SNMP Commands
334 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 14
Spanning Tree Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the Spanning Tree or Rapid
Spanning Tree protocol on the W310:
•
set spantree default-path-cost
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
set spantree default-path-cost
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree default-path-cost command to set the version of the spanning tree default path costs that are to be used by this bridge. The default path costs are as follows:
• common-spanning-tree—uses the 16-bit default path costs from IEEE Std. 802.1D-
1998:
— For 10 MB ports, 100
— For 100 MB ports, 19
— For 1 GB ports, 4
— For 10 GB ports, 3
• rapid-spanning-tree—uses the 32-bit default path costs from IEEE Std. 802.1t:
— 10 Mbps port—2,000,000
— 100 Mbps port—200,000
— 1 Gbps port—20,000
— 10 Gbps port—2,500
! The switch must be running Rapid Spanning Tree to use the Rapid Spanning Tree default path costs. If the switch is running common Spanning Tree, it uses the common
Spanning Tree default path costs regardless of default path cost setting.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 335
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree default-path-cost {common-spanning-tree | rapidspanning-tree}
Syntax Description
common-spanningtree
The default path costs from IEEE 802.1D standard.
rapid-spanning-tree The default path costs from IEEE 802.1W standard.
Example:
W310-1# set spantree default-path-cost rapid-spanning-tree
Spanning tree default path costs is set to rapid spanning tree.
Related Commands:
Use then
show spantree command to display spanning-tree information.
set spantree disable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree disable command to disable Spanning Tree on the switch.
! When you disable Spanning Tree, blocking ports are disabled to prevent loops in the network. To ensure that the disabled ports reflect the current network topology, after you reset the switch, enable STP, or insert a new station, wait 30 seconds before disabling STP.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree disable
336 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 14
Example:
W310-1# set spantree disable success to set spantree to disable
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
set spantree enable
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree enable command to enable Spanning Tree on the switch.
! When you disable STP, blocking ports are disabled to prevent loops in the network. As a result, you need to wait 30 seconds before disabling STP if you reset the switch, enable
STP, or insert a new station.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree enable
Example:
W310-1# set spantree enable success to set spantree to enable
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 337
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
set spantree forward-delay
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree forward-delay command to set the bridge forward delay time parameter. The forward delay time is the time a port takes to change to the forwarding state.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree forward-delay <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
The time that is used when transferring the port to forwarding state. Value range is 4 to 30 seconds and must exceed (Bridge
Max Age/2). Recommended value is 15 seconds.
Example:
W310-1# set spantree forward-delay 15 bridge forward delay set to 15.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
338 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 14
set spantree hello-time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree hello-time command to set the bridge hello time parameter.
The bridge hello time is the time interval (in seconds) between generation of configuration
BPDUs by the root.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree hello-time <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
The time interval (in seconds) between generation of configuration BPDUs by the root. Value ranges between 1 to 10 and must not exceed (Bridge-Max-Age/2) – 1.
The recommended value is 2 sec.
Example:
W310-1# set spantree hello-time 2 bridge hello time set to 2.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 339
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
set spantree max-age
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree max-age command to set the maximum time in seconds that the bridge retains bridging information.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree max-age <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Description
The maximum time in seconds to keep message information before it is discarded. Value range is 6 to 40. The setting must be between 2 x (Bridge-Hello-Time + 1) and 2 x (Bridge-Forward-
Delay – 1). Recommended value is 20 sec.
Example:
W310-1# set spantree max-age 20 bridge max age is set to 20.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
340 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 14
set spantree priority
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree priority command to set the spanning tree priority parameter.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree priority <number>
Syntax
<number>
Description
The priority of the Spanning Tree. The valid range is from 0 to
61440 in increments of 4096. 0 indicates high priority and 61440 indicates low priority. The default setting is 32768.
Example:
W310-1# set spantree priority 4096
Bridge priority set to 4096.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 341
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
set spantree tx-hold-count
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set spantree tx-hold-count command to limit the maximum number of
BPDUs transmitted during a hello-time period.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree tx-hold-count <rate>
Syntax
<rate>
Description
Value between 1 to 10; recommended value is 3
Example:
W310-1# set spantree tx-hold-count 3 tx hold count is set to 3.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
set spantree version
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the set spantree version command to set the version of Spanning Tree that you want the switch to run: Common Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set spantree version <version>
Syntax
<version>
Description
common-spanning-tree – compatible with IEEE 802.1D standard.
rapid-spanning-tree – compatible with IEEE 802.1W standard
342 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Example:
W310-1# set spantree version rapid-spanning-tree
Spanning tree version is set to rapid spanning tree.
Related Commands:
Use then
command to display spanning-tree information.
Chapter 14
show spantree
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use then show spantree command to display spanning-tree information.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show spantree [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 343
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
Example:
W310-1> show spantree
Spanning tree state is enabled
Designated Root: 00-40-0d-8c-88-ff
Designated Root Priority: 32768
Designated Root Cost: 100
Designated Root Port: 1/7
Root Max Age: 20 Hello Time: 2
Root Forward Delay: 15
Bridge ID MAC ADDR: 00-40-0d-b9-89-ff
Bridge ID priority: 32768
Bridge Max Age: 20 Bridge Hello Time: 2
Bridge Forward Delay: 15 Tx Hold Count 3
Spanning Tree Version is rapid spanning tree
Spanning Tree Default Path Costs is according to common spanning tree
Port State Cost Priority
------ ------------- ---------- ------------
1 /1 not-connected 19 128
1 /2 not-connected 19 128
1 /3 LAG-member 19 128
1 /4 LAG-member 19 128
1 /5 not-connected 19 128
1 /6 not-connected 19 128
1 /8 not-connected 19 128
1 /9 not-connected 19 128
1 /10 not-connected 19 128
1 /11 not-connected 19 128
344 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 14
Output Fields:
Field Description
Spanning tree
Designated Root
Designated Root
Priority
Designated Root
Cost
Designated Root
Port
Root Max Age
Hello Time
Status of whether Spanning-Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled
MAC address of the designated spanning-tree root bridge
Priority of the designated root bridge
Total path cost to reach the root
Port through which the root bridge can be reached (shown only on nonroot bridges)
Amount of time that a BPDU packet is valid
Number of times the root bridges sends BPDUs.
Root Forward Delay This time value, measured in units of hundredths of a second, controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving towards the Forwarding state.
Bridge ID MAC
ADDR
Bridge MAC address used in the sent BPDUs
Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Bridge Hello Time
Bridge Forward
Delay
Tx Hold Count
Bridge priority
The value that all bridges use for MaxAge when this bridge is acting as the root.
The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge is acting as the root.
The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge is acting as the root.
Spanning Tree
Version
Spanning Tree
Default Path Costs
The value used by the Port Transmit state machine to limit the maximum transmission rate.
The version of Spanning Tree Protocol the bridge is currently running
The version of the Spanning Tree default Path Costs that are to be used by this Bridge.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 345
Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands
Field
Port
State
Cost
Priority
Description
Port number
Spanning-tree port state (disabled, inactive, not-connected, blocking, listening, learning, forwarding, bridging, or type-pvidinconsistent)
Cost associated with the port
Priority associated with the port
2 of 2
Related Commands:
• Use the
set spantree default-path-cost
command to set the version of the
spanning tree default path costs that are to be used by this bridge.
• Use the
command to disable Spanning Tree on the switch.
• Use the
command to enable Spanning Tree on the switch.
• Use the
set spantree forward-delay command to set the bridge forward
delay time parameter.
• Use the
command to set the bridge hello time
parameter.
• Use the
set spantree max-age command to set the maximum time in seconds
that the bridge retains bridging information.
• Use the
command to set the spanning tree priority parameter.
• Use the
command to limit the maximum number of BPDUs transmitted during a hello-time period.
• Use the
command to set the version of Spanning Tree that
you want the switch to run: Common Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree.
346 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
SSID Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure service set identifiers
(SSIDs):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
broadcast
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the broadcast command to enable or disable a broadcast service set identifier (SSID) for the wireless network. This is done in response to a broadcast SSID probe request where a station is actively seeking an Access Point. The default for this command is disabled. Use the
[no] form of this command to return to its default value.
! When broadcast is enabled to transmit an SSID through its broadcast beacon, you must also set the Closed System parameter to accept-any.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] broadcast <transmit | not-transmit>
Syntax
transmit not-transmit
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Description
Enables a broadcast SSID for the wireless network.
Disables a broadcast SSID for the wireless network.
347
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
Example:
To enable broadcast:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# broadcast transmit
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
To disable broadcast:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# broadcast not-transmit
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the W310 SSID parameters.
closed-system
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the closed-system command to enable or disable a closed system for the wireless network. Enable only one Service Set Identifier (SSID). The default for this command is enabled.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value.
! You must disable closed system (accept-any) whenever you enable broadcast to transmit the SSID through its broadcast beacon.
348 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] closed-system <accept-any | not-accept-any>
Syntax
accept-any not-accept-any
Description
Disables closed system by accepting any SSID.
Enables closed system by accepting only one SSID.
Example:
To disable a closed system:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# closed-system accept-any
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
To enable a closed system:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# closed-system not-accept-any
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 349
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
dynamic-rekeying-interval
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the dynamic-rekeying-interval command to set the encryption rekeying interval in seconds for either the 802.1x or WiFi Protected Access (WPA).
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] dynamic-rekeying-interval <interval>
Syntax
<interval>
Description
The minimum number of seconds for the rekeying interval is 60 seconds and the maximum is 65535. The default value is 3600.
Example:
To set the encryption rekeying interval:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# dynamic-rekeying-interval
900
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
To reset the encryption rekeying interval to the default:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no dynamic-rekeying-interval
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
350 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
security-mode
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the security-mode command to configure the security mode type for the wireless network (SSID). If you do not specify a mode, the current security mode for the wireless network is displayed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the security mode to its default value (none).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] security-mode {none | dot1x | wep | wpa}
Syntax Description
{none | dot1x | wep | wpa}
Configure the security mode for one of the following:
• none - no security. This is the default entry.
• dot1x - 802.1x security
• wpa - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that calls for 802.1x unique keys
• wep - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption keys.
Example:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# security-mode wep
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 351
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
show ssid
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, SSID, LAP
Use the show ssid command to display:
• W310 SSID parameters and the associated Light Access Points (LAPs) (SSID mode), or
• W310 SSID parameters for the specified LAP (LAP mode).
Syntax:
show ssid [<lap-name>]
Syntax Description
No parameters used.
• In SSID mode, displays the W310 SSID table and parameters and the associated LAPs.
• In LAP mode, displays the W310 SSID table and parameters for the specified LAP.
[<lap-name>] Name assigned to the Light Access Point (LAP). This will display only the specified LAP’s SSID table and parameters.
352 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
Example:
To show the W310 SSID table and parameters:
W310-1(super)# show-ssid
----------------------------------------------------------
SSID Name | BC | Cls | Scrty | Eff |Re-Key | VLAN | Acc
| | | | WEP |Interval| |VLAN
---------------------------------------------------------default off off none 2 3600 by UG off lobby off off none 1 3600 by UG off
SSID LAP List Table
-----------------------------------------------------------------
SSID Name | LAP |Slot
----------------------------------------------------------------default none lobby port-02 first
port-05 first
port-06 first
W310-1(super)#
To show the W310 SSID Table and a specific W110 (LAP) parameters:
W310-1(super)# show-ssid port-02
----------------------------------------------------------
SSID Name | BC | Cls | Scrty | Eff |Re-Key | VLAN | Acc
| | | | WEP |Interval| |VLAN
---------------------------------------------------------default off off none 2 3600 by UG off lobby off off none 1 3600 by UG off
LAP port-02 SSID List Table
-----------------------------------------------------------------
SSID Name | Slot
----------------------------------------------------------------lobby first
port-05 first
port-06 first
W310-1(super)#
Related Commands:
Use the
broadcast command to enable or disable a broadcast service set identifier (SSID)
for the wireless network.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 353
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
ssid
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the ssid command to create a Service Set Identifier (SSID) or enter SSID command mode. This is the wireless SSID name. If you do not specify a name, a list of SSID names is displayed.
Use the [no] form of this command to delete SSID entries.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] ssid <name>.
Syntax
<name>
Description
Enter the name you want to assign to the wireless network. This string can be up to 32 characters.
Note: When you delete an SSID entry, the entry is also deleted from all Light Access Points.
Message:
After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:
This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?
• Type Y to reboot the LAP.
• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.
Example:
W310-1(super)# ssid building1
W310-1(super/building1)#
354 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
ssid2lap
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root, SSID, LAP
Use the ssid2lap command to set the Service Set Identifier (SSID) for a specified Light
Access Point (LAP) or do not specify any LAP name to associate to all LAPs.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: ssid2lap [lap-name] [lap-name] .... [lap-name]
Syntax
lap-name
Description
Specify one or more LAPs for which you want to set the SSID. If you do not specify a LAP name, then the SSID is set to all LAPs.
Example:
W310-1(super)# ssid2lap
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 355
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
vlan
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: User Group, SSID
Use the vlan command to set the SSID or user group’s virtual local area network (VLAN).
By default, the VLAN equals the gateway management interface.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Note: The VLAN identifiers are available through the network administrator/planner.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] vlan <vlan> [accessible] | by-user-group-table
Syntax Description
<vlan> VLAN identifier. By default, the VLAN equals the gateway’s management interface. The range is from 1 to 3072. The default value is 1 for the management interface.
accessible VLAN is forwarded to all W310s.
by-user-group-table VLAN is derived from the user group table.
Example:
In the User Group mode:
W310-1(super/User group system)# vlan 8
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/User group system)#
356 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
In the SSID mode:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# vlan 8
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Chapter 15
wep-encryption-key
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the wep-encryption-key command to enable or disable encryption for the wireless interface. This entry displays as asterisks.
Use the command no wep-keys-format to reset the encryption keys to its default format.
Syntax:
[no] wep-encryption-key <index> <key>
Syntax
<index>
<key>
Description
Encryption Key 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default is 1.
Encryption string. The supported key lengths are:
• Up to five (5) characters for 64 bit
• Up to 13 characters for 128 bit
• Up to 16 characters for 152 bit
Example:
To set an encryption key:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key 3 AAAA
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 357
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
To set an encryption key to the default:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no wep-keys-format
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
wep-encryption-key-effective
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: SSID
Use the encryption-key-effective command to indicate which encryption key (0,
1, 2, or 3) to use for wireless data transmission.
Use the [no] form of this command to return the effective encryption key to its default.
Syntax:
[no] wep-encryption-key-effective <index>
Syntax
index
Description
Encryption key (1, 2, 3, or 4) that will be used to encrypt data that is sent via the wireless interface. The default value is 1.
Example:
To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key-effective
3
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
358 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 15
To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no encryption-key-effective
This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 359
Chapter 15 SSID Commands
360 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
System Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the W310 on a system level:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
show tftp download software status
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 361
Chapter 16 System Commands
clear timezone
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear timezone command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time)
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear timezone
Example:
W310-1# clear timezone
Timezone name and offset cleared.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time
difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).
• Use the
command to display the current W310 time zone.
configure
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the configure command to enter configure mode.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: configure
Example:
W310-1# configure
W310-1#
362 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
dir
Use the dir command to show the file types that have been downloaded to the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: dir [module_number]
Syntax
module_number
Description
1
Example:
W310-1> dir
M# file ver num file type file location file description
-- ---- -------- ---------- ------------- ----------------
1 Booter_Image 3.5.17 SW BootImage Nv-Ram Booter Image
1 module-config N/A Running Conf Ram Module Configuration
1 EW_Archive N/A SW Web Image Nv-Ram Web Download
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 363
Chapter 16 System Commands
Output Fields:
Field
M# file ver num file type file location file description
Description
The switch number (always 1)
There are several files loaded into the switch’s memory:
• module-config—Contains the configuration settings made to this switch
• stack-config—Contains the configuration settings made at the stack level (for example IP address of the stack)
• EW_Archive—Contains the Device Manager (Embedded
Web) software
! If N/A is displayed for the EW_Archive file, the Device
Manager software is not loaded correctly. Download the
Device Manager software again.
• Booter_Image—Contains the booter code executed after reset. You cannot replace by this file.
• startup-config—Contains the startup (saved in NVRAM) configuration for policy and routing in the W310
• running-config—Contains the running (currently active) configuration for policy and routing in the W310
S/W Version number—Relevant only for Device Manager and
Booter image.
There are several file types:
• Running Conf—The configuration currently in use.
• Startup-config—Startup configuration for policy and routing in the W310
• SW boot image—Booter file
• SW Web Image—Device Manager software archive file
Type of internal memory in which the file is stored
Description of the file
364 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
get time
Use the get time command to retrieve the time from the network.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: get time
Example:
W310-1# get time
Time is being acquired from server 0.0.0.0
Time has been acquired from the network.
hostname
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the hostname command to change the Command Line Interface (CLI) prompt. The number 1 always appears at the end of the prompt.
Use the no hostname command to restore the default CLI prompt.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] hostname [<hostname_string>]
Syntax Description
[<hostname_string>] • none – displays current hostname
• string – the string to be used as the hostname (up to 20 characters).
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Examples:
W310-1# hostname
Session hostname is ‘W310’
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 365
Chapter 16 System Commands
W310-1# hostname gregory gregory-N# gregory-N# no hostname
W310-1#
nvram initialize
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the nvram initialize command to reset the configuration parameters to their factory defaults.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: nvram initialize {switch | all}
Syntax
switch all
Description
Resets all the Layer 2 switching parameters
Not applicable
Example:
W310-1# nvram initialize
This command will restore factory defaults, and can disconnect your telnet session
*** Reset *** - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Connection closed by foreign host
366 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
reset
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the reset command to restart the W310 switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: reset [<module number>]
Syntax
<module number>
Description
1
Example:
To reset the switch:
W310-1# reset
This command will force a switch-over to the master module and disconnect your telnet session.
Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]? y
Connection closed by foreign host.
reset powerinline
! This command is not applicable.
set boot bank
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set boot bank command to configure the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set boot bank {bank-a | bank-b}
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 367
Chapter 16 System Commands
Example:
W310-1# set boot bank bank-a
Boot bank is set to bank-a
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the software bank from which the switch
will boot at the next boot process.
set bups power
Not applicable.
set license
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set license command to activate the SMON capabilities of an Avaya W310 switch. One SMON license is required per Avaya W310.
For a full description of the SMON License and the installation procedure, see the
Installation Guide provided with the License.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set license <module> <license> <feature name>
Syntax
<module>
<license>
<feature name>
Description
1
License number
Name of the feature
368
Example:
W310-1# set license 1 021 1ad bad ca5 8d2 ccd smon
Related Commands:
Use the
show license command to display the current licenses installed on the switch.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
set queuing scheme
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set queuing scheme command to set the queuing scheme to either strict or weighted round robin and to set the weights.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set queuing scheme {wrr {H:M:N:L} | strict | default} [module]
Syntax
{wrr {H:M:N:L} | strict | default}
[module]
Description
Queuing scheme:
• wrr—Weighted Round Robin
H:M:N:LQ—ratio between priority queues. Enter the ratio in the format of High:Medium:Normal:Low.
• Strict—Strict
• Default—default
Not applicable
Example:
W310-1# set queuing scheme strict
Queuing scheme is set to strict
W310-1# set queuing scheme wrr 8
Queuing scheme is set to wrr 8
Related Commands:
command to display the current queuing scheme settings.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 369
Chapter 16 System Commands
set system contact
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the set system contact command to set the mib2 system contact MIB variable.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set system contact [<string>]
Syntax
[<string>]
Description
• The contact name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).
• Omitting this variable clears the contact name.
Example:
W310-1(super)# set system contact “gregory kohll”
*** Set system contact *** system contact set
set system location
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the set system location command to set the mib2 system location MIB variable
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set system location [<string>]
370
Syntax
[<string>]
Description
• The location name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).
• Omitting this variable clears the location name.
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
Example:
W310-1# set system location “tech-support”
*** Set system location *** system location set
set system name
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set system name command to set the mib2 system name MIB variable.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set system name [<string>]
Syntax
[<string>]
Description
• The system name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).
• Omitting this variable clears the system name.
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set system name “W310-1”
*** Set system name *** system name set
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 371
Chapter 16 System Commands
set time client
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set time client command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server (SNTP or TIME protocol).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set time client {enable | disable}
Syntax
enable disable
Description
Enable periodic network time acquisition
Disable periodic network time acquisition
Example:
W310-1# set time client enable
Time client mode enabled
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the time status and parameters.
372 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
set time protocol
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set time protocol command to set the time protocol for the switch to use:
SNTP or TIME.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set time protocol {sntp-protocol | time-protocol}
Syntax
sntp-protocol time-protocol
Description
Use the SNTP protocol
Use the TIME protocol
Example:
W310-1# set time protocol sntp-protocol
The protocol has been set to SNTP protocol
W310-1# set time protocol time-protocol
The protocol has been set to TIME protocol
Related Commands:
command to display the time status and parameters.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 373
Chapter 16 System Commands
set time server
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set time server command to set the TIME server address.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set time server <ip address>
Syntax
<ip address>
Description
IP address of the TIME server.
Example:
W310-1# set time server 192.49.53.68
The Server Ip has been set to 192.49.53.68
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the time status and parameters.
set timezone
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set timezone command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).
The minutes parameter can be set only to 30.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set timezone <zone-name> {<hours> | <hours:min>}
Syntax
<zone-name>
<hours>
Description
Three-character name of time zone, for example, EST, GMT
The difference between the time zone and GMT
374 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
Example:
W310-1# set timezone EST -5
Timezone set to ’EST’, offset from UTC is -5 hours.
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time)
• Use the
command to display the current W310 time and time zone.
• Use the
command to display the time status and parameters.
• Use the
command to display the current W310 time zone.
set web aux-files-url
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set web aux-files-url command to allow the Device Manager to automatically locate the URL of the Web server containing the Device Manager help files and Java plug-in.
! Ensure that the Web server is always accessible to prevent potential delays in Web access to the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set web aux-files-url <//IP address/directory name>
! To define a directory name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set web aux-files-url //192.168.47.25/emweb-aux-
files
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display the URL/directory from where the switch can access the Device Manager auxiliary files (for example help files).
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 375
Chapter 16 System Commands
set welcome message
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set welcome message command to set a welcome message to appear after a reboot.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set welcome message [<string>]
Syntax
[<string>]
Description
The string to be used as the welcome message.
Omitting this variable restores the default welcome message.
! To define a string that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire string in quotation marks, for example, “new york”.
Example:
W310-1# set welcome message avaya
The new welcome string is "avaya"
show boot bank
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show boot bank command to display the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show boot bank
Example:
W310-1> show boot bank
Boot bank set to bank-a
376 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
Related Commands:
command to configure the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.
show bups power
Not applicable.
show download status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show download status command to display a summary of the last software download operation.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show download status [<module_number>]
Syntax Description
[<module_number>] 1
Example:
W310-1> show download status 1
Mod Bank Download State Activity Status Download Size
----- ------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------
1. Bank B idle Download idle 0
Mod Version Host File
----- --------- ------------- ------------------
1. 3.5.18 149.49.70.61 d:\p340sw\gt-ml\3.5.18\p332gt_ml
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 377
Chapter 16 System Commands
show image version
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show image version command to display the software version of the image on both memory banks.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show image version [<mod_num>]
Syntax
[<mod_num>]
Description
1
Example:
W310-1> show image version
Mod Module-Type Bank Version
------ ----------- ---- -------
1 Cayenne16 board A 0.0.0
1 Cayenne16 board B 90.0.29
show license
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show license command to display the current licenses installed on the switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show license
Example:
W310-1> show license
Mod Application License Key State Feature Flag
--- ------------------- ----------------------------- ---------- ---------
1 smon 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 licensed 1
378 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
Related Commands:
Use the
command to activate the SMON capabilities of an Avaya W310 switch.
show module
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show module command to display switch status and information.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show module [<mod_num>]
Syntax
[<mod_num>]
Description
1
Example:
W310-1> show module
Mod Type C/S S/N Statuses
--- ------------------ ---- -------- ----------------------------
1 Cayenne16 0.0 1234567 PS:AC Fans:Ok Mode:Cayenne
NoCascade Conn-Up:None Conn-Down:None
BUPS BUPS:Not Prsnt Power:800 Watts
Output Fields
Field
Mod
Type
C/S
S/N
Statuses
Description
Switch number (always 1)
Switch type
Hardware Configuration Symbol of the switch
Serial number of the switch
Status of the switch and BUPS
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 379
Chapter 16 System Commands
show module-identity
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show module-identity command to display the switch identity, which is required for acquiring a license.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show module-identity [<module>]
Syntax
[<module>]
Description
1
Example:
W310-1> show module-identity
Mod Module Identity
--- ---------------
1 1234567
380 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
show powerinline
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show powerinline command to display the current status of the power delivery (PD) inline power on all ports.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show powerinline [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]
Syntax
[<mod_num>[/
<port_num>]]
Description
1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:
• To specify port 1, type 1/1
• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5
If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.
Example:
W310-1> show powerinline 1
External power supply is 800 Watts.
External power is not active
Actual power consumption is 0 W.
Port Inline
Operational
Status
----
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/4
...
----------on on on off
Powering
Priority
--------
Low
Low
High
High
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 381
Chapter 16 System Commands
Example:
W310-1> show powerinline 1/1
External power supply is 800 Watts.
External power is not active
Actual power consumption is 0 W.
Port Inline
Operational
Status
----
1/1
----------off
Powering
Priority
--------
Low
show queuing scheme
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show queuing scheme command to display the current queuing scheme settings.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show queuing scheme
Example:
W310-1> show queuing scheme
Queuing scheme: default
Related Commands:
Use the
command to set the queuing scheme to either strict or
weighted round robin and to set the weights.
382 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
show system
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show system command to display the up time, system name, location, and contact person.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show system
Example:
W310-1> show system
Uptime d,h:m:s
------------------------
0,2:40:55
System Name System Location System Contact
--------------------- ------------------------- ---------------------
W310_version-1.0.5 R&D Gregory Kohll
Switch MAC address
------------------
00 40 0d 8a 04 b4
show tftp download software status
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show tftp download software status commands to display the status of the current TFTP Device Manager software (Embedded Web) download process into the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show tftp download status [<mod_num>]
Syntax
[<mod_num>]
Description
1
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 383
Chapter 16 System Commands
Example:
W310-1> show tftp download status
Module #1
===========
Module : 1
Source file : d:\p340sw\gt-ml\3.5.18\p340.web
Destination file : EW_Archive
Host : 149.49.70.61
Running state : Writing ...
Failure display : (null)
Last warning : No-warning
show time
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show time command to display the current W310 time and time zone.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show time
Example:
W310-1> show time
10:32:34 27 JAN 2000 GMT
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server.
• Use the
command to set the time protocol for the switch to
use.
• Use the
command to set the TIME server address.
• Use the
command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time
difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).
• Use the
command to display the time status and
parameters.
384 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
show time parameters
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show time parameters command to display the time status and parameters.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show time parameters
Example:
W310-1> show time parameters
Client status: Enabled
Current time : L:00:57:19 01 JAN 1970 GMT
Timezone set to 'GMT', offset from UTC is 0 hours
Time-Server : 0.0.0.0 (I.e. broadcast address)
Time acquired from Time-Server: 0.0.0.0
Time protocol set to : TIME protcol
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server.
• Use the
command to set the time protocol for the switch to use.
• Use the
command to set the TIME server address.
• Use the
command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time
difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).
show timezone
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show timezone command to display the current W310 time zone.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show timezone
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 385
Chapter 16 System Commands
Example:
W310-1> show timezone
Timezone set to 'GMT', offset from UTC is 0 hours
Related Commands:
• Use the
clear timezone command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time)
• Use the
command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time
difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).
• Use the
show time parameters command to display the time status and
parameters.
show web aux-files-url
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show web aux-files-url command to display the URL/directory from where the switch can access the Device Manager auxiliary files (for example help files).
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show web aux-files-url
Example:
W310-1> show web aux-files-url the web aux-files-url is 149.49.36.212/W310test
Related Commands:
Use the
command to allow the Device Manager to automatically locate the URL of the Web server containing the Device Manager help files and Java plug-in.
386 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 16
sync time
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the sync time command to synchronize the time used.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: sync time
Example:
W310-1> sync time
Time has been distributed.
tech
! This command is reserved for service personnel use only.
Use the tech command to enter tech mode.
tree
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the tree command to display a list of CLI commands available at the current user level.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: tree [<depth>]
Syntax
[<depth>]
Description
Depth of tree output.
If you do not enter a value, the entire tree is displayed.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 387
Chapter 16 System Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# tree session terminal width terminal length no hostname no username no ip telnet-client no ip telnet no ip icmp redirect no ip http no ip access-group no ip access-list no rmon history no rmon alarm no rmon event hostname clear screen clear timezone clear ip route clear snmp trap clear logging server clear logging file clear cam clear log
--type q to quit or space key to continue--
388 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 17
CLI User Interface Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the CLI user interface:
•
•
•
•
•
•
set terminal recovery password
•
•
•
clear screen
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the clear screen command to clear the current terminal display.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear screen
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 389
Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands
help
Use the help command to display a list of all commands at the current level. If a command is specified and has no further sub-commands, the help for that command is displayed. If the command has a sub-command, a brief description of the sub-command is displayed.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: help [<command> [<subcommand>...]]
Example:
W310-1> help username
Username commands:
----------------------------------------------------------
Usage: username <name> password <passwd> access-type {readonly|read-write|admin}
prompt-length
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the prompt-length command to specify the length of the default CLI prompt.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: prompt-length {full | <prompt-size>}
Syntax
full
<prompt-size>
Description
Display the full length of the prompt
Set the length in characters of the prompt to display
Example:
W310-1(super)# prompt-length 4
~r)#
390 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 17
retstatus
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the retstatus command to display the return status of the previously executed command.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: retstatus
Example:
W310-1# retstatus
Succeeded
set logout
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set logout command to set the time in minutes before the system automatically disconnects an idle session. The default setting is 15 minutes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set logout [<timeout in minutes>]
Syntax
[<timeout in minutes>]
Description
Time until the system automatically disconnects an idle session.
• Setting the value to 0 disables the automatic disconnection of idle sessions
• Default value is 15 minutes
• Omitting the <timeout in minutes> variable restores the default setting.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 391
Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands
Example:
• To set the time until the system disconnects an idle session automatically to 20 minutes:
W310-1# set logout 20
Sessions will be automatically logged out after 20 minutes of idle time.
• To disable the automatic disconnection of idle sessions:
W310-1# set logout 0
Sessions will not be automatically logged out.
Related Commands:
command to display the time in minutes that the CLI can remain idle before timing out. If set to 0, there is no time-out limit
set terminal recovery password
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the set terminal recovery password enable command to enable or disable the recovery password feature.
! This command can be run only from the console port on the device.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set terminal recovery password {enable | disable}
Example:
W310-1# set terminal recovery password enable
Done!
392 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 17
show logout
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show logout command to display the amount of time the CLI remains idle before timing out in minutes.
If set to 0, there is no time-out limit. The default is 15 minutes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show logout
Example:
W310-1# show logout
CLI timeout is 10 minutes
show timeout
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show timeout command to display the time in minutes that the CLI can remain idle before timing out. If set to 0, there is no time-out limit. The default is 15 minutes.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show timeout
Example:
W310-1> show timeout
CLI timeout is 10 minutes
Related Commands:
Use the set logout command to set the time in minutes before the system automatically
disconnects an idle session.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 393
Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands
terminal
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the terminal width and terminal length commands to set the width and length of the terminal display in characters.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: terminal {width | length} [<characters>]
Syntax
width length
[<characters>]
Description
Width of display (line length). The default is 80.
Length of display (number of lines). The default is 24.
The number of characters.
Example:
W310-1> terminal width 80 terminal width: 80
394 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure users, user groups, and
RADIUS user authentication on the W310:
•
•
clear radius authentication server
•
•
•
•
set radius authentication retry-number
•
set radius authentication retry-time
•
set radius authentication secret
•
set radius authentication server
•
set radius authentication udp-port
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 395
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
allowed-ap-list
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: user group
Use the allow-ap-list command to specify the allowed Access Points to access on the wireless network. The Access Point (AP) Group is also called the policy enforcement point
(PEP). Use the [no] form of this command for all allowed AP Groups.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] allowed-ap-list {any | {{add | remove} <ap-groups>}}
Syntax
{add | remove} any
<ap-groups>
Description
Add or remove an AP Group from the allowed AP list.
Any allows any AP Group.
Name of the AP group that you want to add or remove from the list of allowed APs. A zero (0) entry means access to this list is denied.
Example:
To enter an allowed list of APs for a user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# allowed-ap-list remove
engineering
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
To add an AP Group to a user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# allowed-ap-list add
lobby conference-rooms
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
396 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
Related Commands:
Use the
command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.
clear radius authentication server
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the clear radius authentication server command to remove a primary or secondary RADIUS authentication server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: clear radius authentication server {primary | secondary}
Syntax
primary secondary
Description
Remove primary RADIUS server
Remove secondary RADIUS server
Example:
W310-1(super)# clear radius authentication server secondary
Related Commands:
•
Use the set radius authentication server
command to set the IP address
(and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.
• Use the
authentication settings.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 397
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
home-gateway
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: user group
Use the home-gateway command to set the user group’s home gateway. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the home gateway to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] home-gateway <ip-address>
Syntax
<ip-address>
Description
Home gateway IP address(es) for the user group. The default value of 00.00.00.00 is a dynamic home gateway assignment, for example, the current W310 is the home gateway.
Example:
To set the home gateway IP address for a user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# home-gateway
149.48.88.97
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
To return to the default home gateway IP address for a user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# no home-gateway
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to create a user group or enter User Group command
mode.
• Use the
command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.
398 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
policy-user-group
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: user-group
Use the policy-user-group command to change the user group ID that associates a policy with a specific user group. The default policy user group (user group ID) is the same name as the user group itself.
After you define the policy user group, you can apply a policy to source traffic from the user group by using the source-user group <policy-user-group-name> command. Or you can apply the policy to destination traffic from the user group by using the destination-user-group <policy-user-group-name>
command.
Use the [no] form of this command to reset the policy user group to its default.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] policy-user-group <policy-name>
Syntax
<policy-name>
Description
Enter the policy name to apply to the user-group. The name can be up to 32 characters. The default policy uses the same name as the user group.
Example:
To assign a policy to a user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# policy-user-group
system
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
To return to the default policy user group:
W310-1(super/User group building1)# no policy-user-group
system
Done!
W310-1(super/User group building1)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 399
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to show the user group table attributes
and default-user-group.
• Use the
source-user-group command to set the source policy user group name.
• Use the
command to set the destination policy user
group name to match.
set radius authentication
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication command to enable or disable RADIUS authentication for the W310 switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication {enable | disable}
Syntax
enable disable
Description
Enable RADIUS authentication
Disable RADIUS authentication (default)
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication enable
Related Commands:
Use the
command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.
400 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
set radius authentication retry-number
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication retry-number to set the number of times the switch sends an access request when there is no response.
The valid range is 0 to 10. The default setting is 1.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication retry-number <number>
Syntax
<number>
Description
Number of retries
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication retry-number 3
Related Commands:
Use the
authentication settings.
set radius authentication retry-time
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication retry-time command to set the time that the switch waits before resending an access request.
The valid range is 1 to 30. The default setting is 7 seconds.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication retry-time <seconds>
Syntax
<seconds>
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Description
Retry time in seconds.
401
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication retry-time 5
Related Commands:
Use the
show radius authentication command to display all RADIUS
authentication settings.
set radius authentication secret
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication secret command to enable secret authentication for the W310 switch.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication secret [string]
Syntax
[string]
Description
password
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication secret hush
Related Commands:
Use the
authentication settings.
402 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
set radius authentication server
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication server command to set the IP address (and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication server <ip-addr> <shared secret>
{primary | secondary}
Syntax
<ip-addr> primary secondary
Description
IP address of the RADIUS authentication server default - Primary authentication server
Secondary authentication server
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication server
192.40.12.36 secret primary
Related Commands:
• Use the
clear radius authentication server
command to remove a primary or secondary RADIUS authentication server.
• Use the
authentication settings.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 403
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
set radius authentication udp-port
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius authentication udp-port command to set the RFC 2138 approved UDP port number for RADIUS authentication.
Normally, the UDP port number should be set to its default value of 1812. Some early implementations of the RADIUS server used port number 1645.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication udp-port <number>
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius authentication udp-port 300
Related Commands:
Use the
authentication settings.
set radius secret
User level: supervisor
Use the set radius secret command to set the RADIUS shared secret.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: set radius secret [string]
Syntax
[string]
Description
password
Example:
W310-1(super)# set radius secret hush
404 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Related Commands:
Use the show radius authentication
command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.
Chapter 18
show
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: user group
Use the show command to show the user group table attributes and default user-group.
Syntax:
show
Example:
W310-1(super/User group engineering)# show
User group: engineering
Policy user group: by ip address
Home mobility gateway: 0.0.0.0
User group vlan: 1
No allowed Apg List
Done!
W310-1(super/User group engineering)#
show radius authentication
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show radius authentication command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show radius authentication
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 405
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
Example:
W310-1> show radius authentication
RADIUS authentication parameters:
---------------------------------
Mode: Enabled
Primary-server: 192.168.42.252
Secondary-server: 192.168.48.134
Retry-number: 4
Retry-time: 5
UDP-port: 1645
Shared-secret: sodot
Related Commands:
• Use the
command to enable or disable RADIUS authentication for the W310 switch.
• Use the
set radius authentication retry-number
times the switch sends an access request when there is no response.
• Use the
set radius authentication retry-time
command to set the time that the switch waits before resending an access request.
• Use the
set radius authentication secret
command to enable secret authentication for the W310 switch.
•
Use the set radius authentication server
command to set the IP address
(and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.
• Use the
set radius authentication udp-port
command to set the RFC
2138 approved UDP port number for RADIUS authentication.
• Use the
command to set the RADIUS shared secret.
show user group table
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: Root, User Group
Use the show user group table command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show user group table
406 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
Example:
W310-1# show-user-group-table
----------------------------------------------------------
User group | Policy group | Home gateway | vlan |
---------------------------------------------------------default by ip address 10.20.6.2(D) 1
Allowed Apg List: all
Done!
Related Commands:
• Use the
allowed-ap-list command to specify the allowed Access Points to access
on the wireless network.
• Use the
command to set the user group’s home gateway.
•
to associate a policy name to a group of users.
• Use the
command to create a user group.
show username
User level: supervisor
Use the show username command to display the local user accounts.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show username
Example:
W310-1(super)# show username
User account password access-type
----------------------------- --------------------------- -------root ***** admin gkohll ***** read-only readwrite ***** read-write
Related Commands:
command to add a local user account.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 407
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
show users profile
User level: supervisor
Use the show users profile command to show a users list and the following user attributes:
• user group name,
• username,
• MAC address,
• ip address,
• policy user group name,
• allowed Access Points (APs),
• current AP group associated to,
• home gateway IP address,
• dynamic or static home gateway,
• vlan,
• EAP type,
• master session key lifetime
• physical port
This command is filtered by either the MAC or IP address with mask.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show users profile [ip <ip-address> | mac <mac>] [wildcard
<wildcard>] [user <all-users | home-gateways-users | foreign- gateway-users>] [lap <lap-name>] [vlan <vlan>]
408
Syntax
<ip-address>
<mac>
<wildcard>
Description
Filter by the IP address.
Filter by the MAC address with mask.
The range of IP addresses of the rule.
The zero bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that remain fixed. The one bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that can vary. Note that this is the opposite of how bits are used in a netmask.
1 of 2
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
Syntax
all-users, home-gatewayusers, or foreign-gatewayusers
<lap-name>
<vlan>
Description
Select to display all users or home or foreign users.
• all-users displays both home and foreign users
• home-gateway-users is where the “home” user roamed, this displays the user’s current (foreign) gateway.
• foreign-gateway-users is where the “foreign” user roamed, this displays the user’s home gateway.
The Light Access Point (LAP) name for which you want to display user attributes.
Filter the display by Virtual LAN (VLAN) selection.
2 of 2
Example:
W310-1(super)# show users profile ip 10.10.10.10
User account password access-type
------------------------------- -------------------------------- -------root ***** admin twriter ***** read-only readwrite ***** read-write
user-group
User level: supervisor
Use the user-group command to create a user group or enter User Group command mode. The total number of user groups allowed is 256. Use the [no] format of this command to delete a user group.
Note: Configure the users that belong the user group on the RADIUS server.
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 409
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] user-group <name>
Syntax
name
Description
• Name of the user-group you want to create. The string can be up to 32 characters. The number of user groups is limited to
256 entries. The default user group is “default”.
• To enter User Group command mode for an existing user group, enter the name of the user-group.
Example:
To create a user group or enter User Group mode for an existing user group:
W310-1(super)# user-group system
W310-1(super/User group system)#
To remove a user-group:
W310-1> W310-1(super/User group system)# no user-group
system
W310-1> Done!
W310-1> W310-1(super)#
Related Commands:
Use the
command to set the user group’s home gateway.
Use the
command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.
Use the
command to show a users’ list and their profiles.
410 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
username
User level: supervisor
Use the username command to add a local user account.
! By default a single user account is configured. The user name for this default user account is root, the password is root, and the access type is administrator. You cannot delete this default user account, nor can you modify its access level. You can, however, modify its password.
Use the no username <name> command to remove a local user account.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: username <name> password <passwd> access-type {read-only | read-write | admin}
Syntax
<name>
<passwd> access-type {read-only | read-write | admin}
Description
New user name (minimum four characters)
! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.
User’s password (minimum four characters)
Access type definition:
• read only
• read-write or
• administrator
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 411
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
Example:
W310-1(super)# username john password johnny access-type
read-write
User account added.
W310-1(super)# username root password secret access-type
read-write
ERROR: User account root has always an administrator access type.
W310-1(super)# username root password secret access-type
admin
User account modified.
Example:
W310-1(super)# no username john
User account removed.
vlan
User level: supervisor
Command Mode: User Group, SSID
Use the vlan command to set the SSID or user group’s virtual local area network (VLAN).
By default, the VLAN equals the gateway management interface.
Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.
Note: The VLAN identifiers are available through the network administrator/planner.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] vlan <vlan> [accessible] | by-user-group-table
412 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 18
Syntax Description
<vlan> VLAN identifier. By default, the VLAN equals the gateway’s management interface. The range is from 1 to 3072. The default value is 4094 for the management interface.
accessible VLAN is forwarded to all W310s.
by-user-group-table VLAN is derived from the user group table.
Example:
In the User Group mode:
W310-1(super/User group system)# vlan 8
Done!
W310-1(super/User group system)#
In the SSID mode:
W310-1(super/SSID building1)# vlan 8
Done!
W310-1(super/SSID building1)#
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 413
Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands
414 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 19
Wireless Domain Commands
This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure a wireless domain for the
W310:
•
show wireless domain parameters
•
•
show wireless domain parameters
User level: user, privileged, supervisor
Use the show wireless domain parameters to display the wireless domain general attributes:
• domain name
• domain master server
• domain backup server
• domain active server
• SpectraLink support
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: show wireless domain parameters
Example:
W310-1(super)# show wireless domain parameters
Master Server: 192.54.2.10
Backup Server: 192.54.4.12
Active Server: 192.54.2.10
Domain: N/A
Spectralink: not supported
IP Multicast Over The Air: supported
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 415
Chapter 19 Wireless Domain Commands
Related Commands:
Use the wireless-domain-servers command to set the master and backup servers in
addition to a wireless domain name.
wireless-domain-servers
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Use the wireless-domain-servers command to set the master and backup servers in addition to a wireless domain name.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is: wireless-domain-servers <master-ip-address> [<backup-ipaddress> <domain-name>]
Syntax
master-ip-address
<backup-ipaddress>
<domain-name>
Description
IP address of the master mobility server.
IP address of the backup (redundant) mobility server.
Name for the domain. This is usually a cluster of W310 switches that allows roaming. Use up to 64 characters.
Example:
W310-1# wireless-domain-servers 192.168.49.75
192.168.49.88 R&D
Done!
Related Commands:
Use the
show wireless domain parameters
to display the wireless domain
general attributes.
416 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Chapter 19
wireless-domain-secret
User level: privileged, supervisor.
Command Mode: Root
Use the wireless-domain-secret command to set the secret that is used in a gateway-to-gateway and gateway-to-Light Access Point (LAP) communication. The W310 has a predefined secret. When you type and retype in a secret, the secret appears as asterisks.
Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default secret.
Syntax:
The syntax for this command is:
[no] wireless-domain-secret <secret> <retype-secret>
Syntax
<secret>
<retype-secret>
Description
Secret for gateway-to-gateway and gateway-to-LAP communication. Enter a string of up to 32 characters. The W310 has a default secret.
Retype the secret exactly as you did the first time.
Example:
W310-1# wireless-domain-secret r6vte 3
Done!
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 417
Chapter 19 Wireless Domain Commands
418 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
Index of CLI Commands
A
add-ports
allowed-ap-list
apply-template
assoc-response-timeout
automatic-channel-selection-band
B
C
change-lap-name
channel-frequency
clear cam
clear log
clear logging server
clear port mirror
clear port static-vlan
clear radius authentication server
clear rmon statistics
clear screen
clear snmp trap
clear statistics
clear utilization cpu
clear-policy-statistics
closed-system
composite-operation
cookie
copy mobility-startup tftp
copy stack-config tftp
copy startup-config tftp
copy tftp LAP_image
copy tftp mobility-startup
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
copy tftp stack-config
copy tftp startup-config
copy tftp SW_image
copy tftp SW_powerinline_image
copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup 30
copy wireless-gateway-running tftp 31
copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp 33
D
destination-ip
destination-user-group
dir
dscp-table
dynamic-rekeying-interval
E
erase startup-config
ether-type
ether-type-rule
ether-type-simulate
F
fragmentation-threshold
G
get time
H
home-gateway
hostname
I
interface AP-Group
inter-wireless-gateways-secret
ip access-control-list
ip policy-list-copy
ip qos-list
381
ip telnet enable
ip telnet-client
ip-fragments-in
ip-option-in
ip-protocol
ip-simulate
L
lap
lap-location
lap-template
lb-adj-ap-time-difference
lb-tx-time
long-retry-limit
M
mac-address-authorized-list
mac-address-authorized-list-default
max-tx-msdu-lifetime
multicast-tx-rate
N
nvram initialize
O
owner
P
power-up-lap
pre-classification
R
radio-card-802.11
radio-card-template
reboot-lap
reset powerinline
restore-to-factory-default
rmon alarm
382 rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list
rogue-ap-interval
rts-threshold
S
set allowed managers
set arp-aging-interval
set bups power
set dot1x max-req
set dot1x quiet-period
set dot1x re-authperiod
set dot1x supp-timeout
set dot1x system-auth-control disable
set dot1x system-auth-control enable
set dot1x tx-period
set inband vlan
set intelligent-multicast
set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time
set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time
set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time
set interface ppp enable/disable/off/reset
set intermodule port redundancy
set ip route
set license
set logging file
set logging file condition
set logging server access-level
set logging server condition 159
set logging server disable
set logging server enable
set logging server facility
set logging session disable 165
set logging session enable
set mac-aging
set mac-aging-time
set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertise-
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
ment
set port disable
set port dot1x initialize
set port dot1x max-req
set port dot1x port-control 259
set port dot1x quiet-period 260
set port dot1x re-authenticate 261
set port dot1x re-authentication 262
set port dot1x re-authperiod 263
set port dot1x server-timeout
set port dot1x supp-timeout 265
set port dot1x tx-period
set port duplex
set port flowcontrol
set port level
set port mirror
set port name
set port point-to-point admin status
set port powerinline priority
set port redundancy
279 set port redundancy {enable | disable} 279
set port spantree cost
set port spantree enable
set port spantree force-protocol-migration
set port spantree priority
set port static-vlan
set port trap
set port vlan
set port vlan-binding-mode
set ppp authentication incoming
set ppp baud-rate
set ppp chap-secret
set ppp incoming timeout
set radius authentication retry-time
set radius authentication secret 402
set radius authentication server
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide set radius authentication udp-port
set radius secret
set snmp community
set snmp timeout
set snmp trap
set snmp trap auth
set spantree disable
set spantree enable
set spantree hello-time
set spantree max-age
set spantree priority
set spantree tx-hold-count
set system location
set system name
set terminal recovery password 392
set time client
set time protocol
set time server
set timezone
set utilization cpu
short-retry-limit
short-slot-time-implemented
show
show allowed managers status
46 show allowed managers table 46
show arp-aging-interval
show arp-tx-interval
show boot bank
show cam
show dev log file
show dot1x
show dot1x statistics
show download status
show intelligent-multicast hardware-support
383
show intermodule port redundancy 292
show ip access-control-list 211
show ip active-policy-lists 212
show ip route
show ip-rule
show l2-stack-config
show lap parameters
show list
show logging file condition
show logging file content
show logging server condition 171
show logging session condition
show mac address authorized list
show mac-aging
show mac-aging-time
show port
show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement
show port classification
show port dot1x
show port dot1x statistics
show port edge state
show port flowcontrol
show port mirror
show port point-to-point status
show port redundancy
show port trap
show port vlan-binding-mode
show ppp authentication
show ppp baud-rate
show ppp configuration
show ppp incoming timeout
show ppp session
show queuing scheme
show radius authentication
show rmon alarm
show rmon event
show rmon history
384 show rmon statistics
show rogue ap authorized mac list 135
show secure current
show snmp retries
show template parameters
show tftp download software status
show time
show time parameters
show trunk
show upload status
show user group table
show username
show vlan
show web aux-files-url
show-ap-group
source-user-group
spectralink-compatible-phone
ssid
ssid2lap
sync time
T
tcp destination-port
tcp-established
tech
tx-power-level
U
udp destination-port
unicast-tx-rate
V
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
W
wep-encryption-key-effective
wireless-domain-secret
wireless-domain-servers
Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 385
386 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement